1 MM-Master
-
Upload
nikhilesh-kumar-panda -
Category
Documents
-
view
215 -
download
0
Transcript of 1 MM-Master
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 1/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 1
BSNL
USER MANUAL : Mas t e r
Version:1.0
01/09/2010
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 2/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 2
Table of Contents
1. Material Master ...................................................................................................................................... 4 1. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZADM .................................................................................................. 4
2. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZCAP ................................................................................................. 44
3. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZCN ................................................................................................... 79
4. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZCV ..................................................................................................116
5. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZEL ..................................................................................................153
6. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZFGN ...............................................................................................190
7. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZFGS ................................................................................................227
8. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZIT ...................................................................................................264
9. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZMKT ...............................................................................................301
10. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZNVL ...........................................................................................338
11. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZRM ............................................................................................373
12. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZSAC ............................................................................................410
13. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZSOA ...........................................................................................447
14. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZSOI ............................................................................................480
15. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZTCS ............................................................................................512
16. MM-MM02-Material-Change ....................................................................................................549
17. MM-MM03-Material-Display ....................................................................................................557
18. MM-MM04-Material-Display Changes ......................................................................................563
19. MM-MM50-Material-List Extendable Material .........................................................................568
2. Service Master ................................................................................................................................... 574
1. MM-AC03-Service-Create Change Display ....................................................................................574
2. MM-AC06-Service Master-List Display ..........................................................................................581
3. MM-ML10-Model Service Specifications-Create ..........................................................................589
4. MM-ML11-Model Service Specification-Change ...........................................................................598
5. MM-ML12-Model Service Specification-Display ...........................................................................603
3. Vendor Master ................................................................................................................................... 608
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 3/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 3
1. MM-XK01-Vendor-Create (centrally) ............................................................................................608
2. MM-XK02-Vendor-Change (centrally) ...........................................................................................625
3. MM-XK03-Vendor-Display (centrally) ...........................................................................................634
4. MM-XK04-Vendor-Changes (Centrally) .........................................................................................642
5. MM-XK05-Vendor-Block (Centrally) ..............................................................................................649
6. MM-XK06-Vendor-Flag for deletion ..............................................................................................654
7. MM-MKVZ-List Display ..................................................................................................................659
8. MM-ZMMP_VCL01_Vendor_Class and Value_Maintenance ........................................................663
9. MM-ZMMP_VC01_Vendor Classification Maintenance ...............................................................665
4. Price Info Record ............................................................................................................................... 669
1. MM-ME11-Info Record-Create...................................................................................................... 669
2. MM-ME12-Info Record-Change ....................................................................................................679
3. MM-ME13-Info Record-Display .....................................................................................................690
5. Source List ......................................................................................................................................... 695
1. MM-ME01-Source List-Maintain ...................................................................................................695
2. MM-ME03-Source List-Display ......................................................................................................698
3. MM-ME0M-Source List for Material .............................................................................................701
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 4/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 4
1. Material Master
1. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZADM
Overview
A material master is required for a material.
A material needs to have additional department views created.
A new material is to be used in a production process.
A material needs to be extended to another plant.
Requirement for Valuation of material in the Material Master.
A need to define a Production Resource / Tool as a Material.
Business Process Description Overview
Material masters are created when a material required is not defined in the material master. Control ofmaster data depends largely on how each company sets up its Organizational levels - centralized or
decentralized. Some material data is valid for all organizational levels while other data is valid only atcertain levels. (i.e.: client, plant, sales org., etc.). All functional areas of the system use the same material
master data. The material master data is defined in individual screens (departmental views) that can beadded as needed. Thus a material can be created with only basic data and other departments can add
other information later as it becomes available.
The views possible for material are controlled by the material type selected.
For a material to be used in the system it needs to be created for each plant. Multiple views of a materialare possible but at a minimum, the material needs to have a description and a base unit of measureassigned on the basic data view. Additional department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, MRP)can be added at a later time by extending the material. As additional plants are added, a material will
need to be extended to the plants before it can be used there.
A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions are
to be carried out for that PRT. The information required to be input is dependent upon which
department views are being created. Thus, material master information is typically entered atdifferent times by numerous system users. Note that to add a view, the “Create Material” transaction is used rather than the “Change Material” transaction.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 5/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 5
Input - Required Fields Field Value / Comments
Material Required as using external numbers.
Industry Sector Enter T Telecom Industry
Material Type Press F4 to call the list of choices. Select “ZADM” for Material
Type – Admin Material
Base Unit of Measure Enter the inventory unit of measure (Example PC, EA)
Other information Depending upon the views to be created, additional informationwill be required
Output - Results Comments New material created Material Created and available for other activities
New view added to a material View AddedMaterial extended to a new plant Material extended
BPP Table of Contents
Since a material can have from 1 to more than 30 views depending upon the material type and views
desired, a user should select the relevant sections of this document and ignore the views that are not
desired. The procedural steps included in this document are as follows:
Basic Data
Purchasing
Purchase Order Text
MRP
Forecasting
Plant data/storage
Quality mgt.
Accounting
Costing Plant stock
Storage location stock
Extending a material to add a departmental view
Extending a material to another plant
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 6/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 6
Tips and Tricks
If no other view exists, you must enter the base (standard / inventory) Unit of measure anda material description.
Using a reference material (similar characteristics etc.) saves a lot of effort as all the views
will
be copied over and can be changed or overwritten.
Note: When creating the MRP Views (or any view for that matter), the Industry Sector and
Material type will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least oneview exists.
The material data can be entered with or without an MRP profile. An MRP profile contains
typical MRP data for a particular procedure. The values can be fixed (cannot be changed) of
default values (can be overridden). The MRP profile simplifies data entry in the master
record. For example if an MRP controller looks after similar material at several plants, a
profile will be defined in the system and assigned to new materials as they are created.
To set user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:
Views:
Menus: Defaults >> Views
Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a new
material.
Select ‘View selection only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to be by-
passed unless selected.
Organizational levels:
Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels
Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a new
material.
Select ‘Org. levels/profiles only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to
be by-passed unless selected.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 7/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 7
To extend a material to a different plant requires selecting the new plant on the organizational levelscreen. Note that all views of a material are not extended unless they were selected on the initialscreen. In addition, each plant may have a different system configuration requiring additional inputson each of the departmental screens. Material changes made in one plant do not change that materialin other plants.
To determine which views of a material need to be added or to see which plants a material has beenextended to, use transaction MM50 (Logistics>Material Management>Material
Master>Other>Extend Material View(s)).
Procedure Steps
Access transaction by:
Via Menus
(a) Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediate
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>MaterialMaster>Material > Create(General)
(d) Logistics> Logistics Execution> Master Data > Material >Material > Create>Immediately
(e) Logistics>Central function >Engineering> Material
>Material>Create (General) > Immediately(f) Accounting>Project Systems > Basic Data > Master Data
>Material>Create(g) Logistics>Environmental Health & Safety> Dangerous
Goods Management> Environment> Material
master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately(h) Logistics>Customer Service > Technical Objects> Material
>Create (General) > Immediately(i) Logistics>Plant Maintenance> Technical
Objects>Material>Create (General) > Immediately(j) Logistics>Sales & Distribution> Master data >Products >Bill
of Materials> Environment> Material Master >Material >
Create (General)(k) Logistics>Material Management>Material
master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
Via Transaction Code MM01
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 8/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 8
On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Key identifying material N/A Leave Blank, as this is internal
no assignment. System willassign a new no for the
material
Industry
Sector
Specifies branch of industry
to which material is assigned
R Type T (Telecom Industry) or
select from pull down menu
Material
Type
Group to which material is
assigned.
R Type ZADM or select from the
Pull Down Menu
.
Copy From
Material:
Similar material from which th
system obtains selected values.
O Leave blank, unless new
material is based on anexisting material
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 9/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 9
Press Enter.
On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes
Click on Basic Data 1, and any other views needed.
Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specif ic material types
wil l not contain certain views.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 10/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 10
Press Enter.
On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Organizati
onal Levels
Section Header
Plant Plant identification key O Enter Plant where material will
be active or select from pulldown menu
StorageLocation
Storage LocationIdentification key
O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or select
from pull down menu
Profiles Section HeaderMRPProfile
MRP Parameters C Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that are
independent of the materialmaster record.
Forecast Forecast profile C Key that allows you to store
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 11/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 11
prof. forecast parametersindependently of a material
master record.
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 12/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 12
On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 1 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 13/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 13
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Material Description R Enter in material description
Base Unit
of Measure
Units of measure in which
stocks of the material aremanaged
R Enter UOM or select from pull
down list
MaterialGroup
Key allowing grouping ofsame or similar materials
R Enter Material Group
OldMaterial
Number
Legacy system material number previous SAP material master n
O Enter if appropriate
X Plant
Matl Status
Indicates whether the material
may be used within differentdepartments
C Enter if appropriate As of now this
field will not be used.However
depending onrequirement,this can beused afterimplementatio
n
Generic
Req. Number
Generic Requirement Number O Enter if Appropriate
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 14/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 14
On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 2 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 15/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 15
Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Ind. StdDesc.
Description Of TheMaterial in accordance
with the appropriateindustry standard.
OPart Number to be maintained
Document Number of the drawing thatexists for this object.
O Drawing Number to bemaintained.
On the tab “Purchasing” enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 16/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 16
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 17/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 17
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Base Unitof Measure
Inventory UOM R Defaults in from Basic Data 1screen.
Not to bechanged orused here
Order Unit UOM for ordering O Enter only if different from
base UOM and required byVendor
If defined
here, orderingunit will becommon forall POs andhence
recommendedto be used atPO level and
not in purchasing
view
Purchasing
Group
Group Responsible for purchas
Material
R Enter or select from pull down li
Material
Group
Group code of like materials R Defaults in from Basic Data 1 sc Not to be
changed orused here
Plantsp.matl
status
Plant specific material status.Determines availability of
Material for purchase or production
O Blank indicates available As of now thisfield will not
be used.
BatchManageme
nt
Identifies the material asmanaged by batch O Check if appropriate It will bemaintained
only for thosematerials forwhich shelf
life needs to be maintained.
Purchasin
g Values
Section Heading
PurchasingValue Key
Identifies follow up intervalsand delivery tolerances
O Select appropriate key from pull down list
Other
Data
Section Heading
GRProcessing
time
Number of days required toinspect and place in storage
O Enter number of days ifrelevant
This will besame for
material type.However it
can be
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 18/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 18
different forindividual
material aswell.
Source List Mandates entry of supplier before PO issues
O Check box if appropriate It will bemaintained forProprietaryItems
Mfr. Partnumber
Manufacturer part number O Enter number if appropriate This field will be used to
capturemanufacturer's
part no. for
proprietaryitems only
Mfr. Manufacturer identifier O Use pull down menu This field will be used in
case of item is proprietary.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 19/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 19
On tab “Purchase order text” enter appropriate text in the desired languages
and press enter. OPTIONAL
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 20/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 20
On tab “MRP1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 21/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 21
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 22/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 22
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
Data Section Heading
Base Unit ofMeasure
Inventory Unit of measure R Enter the inventory unit ofmeasure for this product
Defaults ifBasic Data 1
view exists
MRP
Procedure Section Heading
MRP Type Identifies the type of MRP/MPS to be performed
R Mainly, no planning (ND) andmanual reorder point planning(VB) will be used
After thegeneration ofsufficient datain the SAP,later on
automaticreorder point
planning (VM)may beconsidered.
Reorder point Reorder point O Enter value
MRPController
Code for the personresponsible for MRP/MPSfor this material
O Press F4 for list. Select desiredcode from the list
Lot Size
Data
Section Heading
Lot Size Identifies the type of LotSizing that will occur. O "Replenish to maximum stock -HB" will be used.
Maximum
stock level
Maximum stock level
allowed
O Enter value
Rounding
value
Rounding value for
purchase order quantity.Value to a multiple ofwhich the system rounds upthe procurement quantity.
O Enter value
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 23/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 23
On tab “MRP2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 24/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 24
Field Name Description R/O/C
User Action and Values Comments
Scheduling
Plnd DeliveryTime
Number of days required toobtain material obtained
externally
O Enter number of days if needed
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 25/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 25
On tab “MRP3”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 26/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 26
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Availability
Check
Identifies whether total
requirements by period areto be used or individualRequirements
R Enter 01 (period) or 02
(individual). NOTE: This is the onlyrequired field on this screen
Preference
depends uponcompany
Tot. Repl.Lead Time
Total lead time for finished product, including production and
procurement along thelongest path
O Enter time in days
Cross project Indicator for cross projectmaterial
O Use pull down menu
Press Enter.
On tab “Forecasting”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
Not Applicable
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
data
Section header
Forecastmodel
Indicator that defines onwhich forecast model the
system bases its calculation offuture requirements of the
material.
R Use pull down to changedefault value
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 27/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 27
On tab “Plant data/stor. 1” enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 28/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 28
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 29/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 29
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
Data
Section Heading
Base Unit of
Measure
Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pull
down list
Defaults from
Basic Data
Unit of Issue Unit in which material is
issued
O Enter Unit of Issue or select
from pull down list
Storage bin Storage bin O Enter value is appropriate
Ph. Inv.Indicator for
cyclecounting
Indicates that the givenmaterial is subject to the
cycle counting method ofinventory. The indicator
also defines at which timeintervals a physicalinventory is to be carried
out for the material
O Select from pull down menu
Shelf Life
Data
Section Heading
Min. Rem.
Shelf Life
Number of days material
needs to be kept for thesystem to accept
O Enter number of days.
Total ShelfLife
Number of days materialwill keep in total
O Enter number of days
Period
Indicator forshell life
The period indicator
specifies the unit ofmeasurement for a periodof time
O Enter number of days
Old Material Number
Plant Specific Old materialnumber
O Enter Old Material Number
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 30/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 30
On tab “Plant data/stor.2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 31/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 31
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General plant parameters
Section header
Neg. stocksin plant
Negative stocks allowed in plant
O Check box as appropriate
Log.Handlinggroup
Logistics handling groupfor workload calculation
O Use pull down menu
Serial No.
profile
Serial number profile O Use pull down menu
Dist. Prof Distribution profile ofmaterial in plant
O Use pull down menu
Profit center Profit center R Use pull down menu
Stockdetermin.Group
The stock determinationgroup combined with theStock Determination Ruleat plant level create a key
for the stock determination
strategy.
O Use pull down menu
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 32/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 32
On tab “Quality management”, enter information in the fields as specified in
the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 33/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 33
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General data Section header
Base Unit ofmeasure
Base unit of measure R defaults from Basic data View
Procurement
data
Section header
Inspectiontype
The inspection type defineshow an inspection is
performed. Several
inspection types can beassigned to an inspection lotorigin.
O
QM controlkey
Control Key for QualityManagement in Procurement
O Use pull down menu
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 34/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 34
On tab “Accounting 1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 35/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 35
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
Data Section Heading
Base Unit ofMeasure
Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list
Defaults fromBasic Data.
ValuationCategory
Indicates whether stocksare valuated together or
separately
O
Current
Valuation
Section Heading
Valuation
Class
Defines which group of
G/L accounts material isassigned
R Select from pull down menu to
change default value
Prom. stk val.Class
Valuation Class for ProjectStock. Default value forthe valuation class forvaluated project stocks ofthe material.
R Use pull down menu
Price Control Defines whether material is
valuated with standard ormoving average price
R „V‟ – Moving Average Price Defaults in
from thematerial type.
Mov. Avg.Price Moving average price ofthe material C Enter price
Press Enter.
On tab “Costing 1” and tab “Costing 2”, Only views will be maintained, no
field will be populated as of now.
Not Applicable
On tab “Plant stock ”, information is displayed regarding the stocks of this
material in this plant: Automatic
Not Applicable
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 36/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 36
On tab “Stor. location stock”, information is displayed regarding the stocks
of this material in this storage location: AutomaticNot Applicable
Save to create the material using the “save” button or use the “Ctrl S” key combination.
To extend a material to add an additional department view:
Access transaction by:
Via Menus (a) Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>MaterialMaster>Material > Create(General)
Via Transaction Code MM01
On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 37/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 37
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Key identifying material R Enter material number
IndustrySector
Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material
MaterialType
Group to which material isassigned.
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material
Copy FromMaterial:
Similar material from which thsystem
obtains selected values
O Leave blank.
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 38/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 38
On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes for the
screen(s) to be added.
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 39/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 39
On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed will depend upon the views selected.
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Organizati
onal Levels
Section Header
Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will
be active or select from pulldown menu
StorageLocation
Storage LocationIdentification key
O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or select
from pull down menu
Profiles Section Header
MRP
Profile
MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that areindependent of the
Forecast prof.
Forecast profile O Key that allows you to storeforecast parametersindependently of a material
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 40/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 40
master record.
Press Enter.
Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
this document on page 2).
To extend a material to another plant:
Access transaction by:
Via Menus (a) Logistics>Material Management>Material
master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
Via Transaction Code MM01
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 41/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 41
On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Key identifying material R Enter material number
IndustrySector
Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material
Material
Type
Group to which material is
assigned.
O Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored forthis material
Copy FromMaterial:
Similar material from which thsystem
obtains selected values
O Leave blank.
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 42/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 42
Press Enter.
On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check at least one box other than the
basic data views.
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 43/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 43
On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter the plant number and other
information in the fields as specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed depends upon the screens selected.
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Organizati
onal Levels
Section Header
Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will be active or select from pulldown menu
Storage
Location
Storage Location
Identification key
O Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or selectfrom pull down menu
Profiles Section Header
MRP
Profile
MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that areindependent of the
Forecast
prof.
Forecast profile O Key that allows you to store
forecast parametersindependently of a materialmaster record.
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 44/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 44
2. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZCAP
Overview
A material master is required for a material.
A material needs to have additional department views created.
A new material is to be used in a production process.
A material needs to be extended to another plant.
Requirement for Valuation of material in the Material Master.
A need to define a Production Resource / Tool as a Material.
Business Process Description Overview
Material masters are created when a material required is not defined in the material master. Control ofmaster data depends largely on how each company sets up its Organizational levels - centralized ordecentralized. Some material data is valid for all organizational levels while other data is valid only at
certain levels. (i.e.: client, plant, sales org., etc.). All functional areas of the system use the same materialmaster data. The material master data is defined in individual screens (departmental views) that can be
added as needed. Thus a material can be created with only basic data and other departments can addother information later as it becomes available.
The views possible for material are controlled by the material type selected.
For a material to be used in the system it needs to be created for each plant. Multiple views of a materialare possible but at a minimum, the material needs to have a description and a base unit of measureassigned on the basic data view. Additional department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, MRP )
can be added at a later time by extending the material. As additional plants are added, a material willneed to be extended to the plants before it can be used there.
A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions areto be carried out for that PRT. The information required to be input is dependent upon which
department views are being created. Thus, material master information is typically entered atdifferent times by numerous system users. Note that to add a view, the “Create Material” transaction
is used rather than the “Change Material” transaction.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 45/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 45
Input - Required Fields Field Value / Comments
Material N/A as there is an internal number assignment.
Industry Sector Enter T for Telecom Industry
Material Type Press F4 for list of choices. Select “ZCAP” for Material Type – Capital Items
Base Unit of Measure Enter the inventory unit of measure (Example EA, PC, LB, GA)
Other information Depending upon the views to be created, additional informationwill be required
Output - Results Comments New material created Material Created and available for other activities
New view added to a material View AddedMaterial extended to a new plant Material extended
BPP Table of Contents
Since a material can have from 1 to more than 30 views depending upon the material type and views
desired, a user should select the relevant sections of this document and ignore the views that are notdesired. The procedural steps included in this document are as follows:
Basic Data
Purchasing
Purchase Order Text
MRP
Forecasting
Plant data/storage
Quality mgt.
Accounting
Costing
Plant stock
Storage location stock
Extending a material to add a departmental view
Extending a material to another plant
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 46/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 46
Tips and Tricks
If no other view exists, you must enter the base (standard / inventory) Unit of measure and
a material description.
Using a reference material (similar characteristics etc.) saves a lot of effort as all the views
will be copied over and can be changed or overwritten.
Note: When creating the MRP Views (or any view for that matter), the Industry Sector and
Material type will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least oneview exists.
The material data can be entered with or without an MRP profile. An MRP profile contains
typical MRP data for a particular procedure. The values can be fixed (cannot be changed) of
default values (can be overridden). The MRP profile simplifies data entry in the master
record. For example if an MRP controller looks after similar material at several plants, a
profile will be defined in the system and assigned to new materials as they are created.
To set user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:
Views:
Menus: Defaults >> Views
Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a new
material.
Select ‘View selection only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to be by-
passed unless selected.
Organizational levels:
Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels
Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a new
material.
Select ‘Org. levels/profiles only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to
be by-passed unless selected.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 47/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 47
To extend a material to a different plant requires selecting the new plant on the organizational levelscreen. Note that all views of a material are not extended unless they were selected on the initial
screen. In addition, each plant may have a different system configuration requiring additional inputson each of the departmental screens. Material changes made in one plant do not change that material
in other plants.
To determine which views of a material need to be added or to see which plants a material has beenextended to, use transaction MM50 (Logistics>Material Management>Material
Master>Other>Extend Material View(s)).
Procedure Steps
Access transaction by:
Via Menus
(a) Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediate
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)(d) Logistics> Logistics Execution> Master Data > Material >
Material > Create>Immediately(e) Logistics>Central function >Engineering> Material
>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(f) Accounting>Project Systems > Basic Data > Master Data>Material>Create
(g) Logistics>Environmental Health & Safety> DangerousGoods Management> Environment> Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(h) Logistics>Customer Service > Technical Objects> Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(i) Logistics>Plant Maintenance> TechnicalObjects>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(j) Logistics>Sales & Distribution> Master data >Products >Bill
of Materials> Environment> Material Master >Material >Create (General)
(k) Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
Via Transaction Code MM01
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 48/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 48
On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values CommentsMaterial Key identifying material N/A System will assign a newnumber
IndustrySector
Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned
R Type T (Telecom Industry) orselect from pull down menu
Material
Type
Group to which material is
assigned.
R Type ZCAP or select from the
Pull Down Menu
.
Copy From
Material:
Similar material from which th
system obtains selected values.
O Leave blank, unless new
material is based on anexisting material
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 49/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 49
On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes
Click on Basic Data 1, and any other views needed.
Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specif ic materi al types
wil l not contain certain views.
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 50/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 50
On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Organizati
onal Levels
Section Header
Plant Plant identification key O Enter Plant where material will be active or select from pulldown menu
StorageLocation
Storage LocationIdentification key
O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or selectfrom pull down menu
Profiles Section Header
MRP
Profile
MRP Parameters C Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that areindependent of the material
master record.
Forecast
prof.
Forecast profile C Key that allows you to store
forecast parametersindependently of a materialmaster record.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 51/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 51
Press enter.
On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 1 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 52/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 52
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Material Description R Enter in material description
Base Unitof Measure Units of measure in whichstocks of the material are
managed
R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list
Material
Group
Key allowing grouping of
same or similar materials
R Enter Material Group
Old
Material Number
Legacy system material numbe
previous SAP material master
O Enter if appropriate
X PlantMatl Status
Indicates whether the materialmay be used within differentdepartments
C Enter if appropriate As of now thisfield will not
be used.However
depending onrequirement,this can beused afterimplementation
GenericReq.
Number
Generic Requirement Number O Enter if Appropriate
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 53/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 53
On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 2 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 54/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 54
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Ind. Std
Desc.
Description Of The
Material in accordancewith the appropriateindustry standard.
O
Part Number to be maintained
Document Number of the drawing thatexists for this object.
O Drawing Number to bemaintained.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 55/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 55
On the tab “Purchasing” enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values CommentsBase Unit
of Measure
Inventory UOM R Defaults in from Basic Data 1
screen.
Not to be
changed orused here
Order Unit UOM for ordering O Enter only if different from base UOM and required by
If definedhere, ordering
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 56/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 56
Vendor unit will becommon for
all POs andhence
recommendedto be used atPO level and
not in purchasing
view
Purchasing
Group
Group Responsible for purchas
Material
R Enter or select from pull down li
Material
Group
Group code of like materials R Defaults in from Basic Data 1 sc Not to be
changed orused here
Plantsp.matl
status
Plant specific material status.Determines availability of
Material for purchase or production
O Blank indicates available As of now thisfield will not
be used.
BatchManageme
nt
Identifies the material asmanaged by batch
O Check if appropriate It will bemaintained
only for thosematerials forwhich shelf
life needs to be maintained.
Purchasin
g Values
Section Heading
PurchasingValue Key
Identifies follow up intervalsand delivery tolerances
O Select appropriate key from pull down list
Other
Data
Section Heading
GRProcessingtime
Number of days required toinspect and place in storage
O Enter number of days ifrelevant
This will besame formaterial type.However it
can be
different forindividual
material aswell.
Source List Mandates entry of supplier before PO issues
O Check box if appropriate It will bemaintained for
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 57/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 57
ProprietaryItems
Mfr. Partnumber
Manufacturer part number O Enter number if appropriate This field will be used to
capturemanufacturer's
part no. for proprietary
items only
Mfr. Manufacturer identifier O Use pull down menu This field will
be used incase of item is
proprietary.
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 58/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 58
On tab “Purchase order text” enter appropriate text in the desired languages
and press enter. OPTIONAL
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 59/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 59
On tab “MRP1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 60/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 60
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
Data
Section Heading
Base Unit ofMeasure
Inventory Unit of measure R Enter the inventory unit ofmeasure for this product
Defaults ifBasic Data 1view exists
MRP
Procedure
Section Heading
MRP Type Identifies the type of MRP
/MPS to be performed
R Mainly, no planning (ND) and
manual reorder point planning(VB) will be used
After the
generation ofsufficient data
in the SAP,later onautomatic
reorder point planning (VM)
may beconsidered.
Reorder point Reorder point O Enter value
MRP
Controller
Code for the person
responsible for MRP/MPSfor this material
O Press F4 for list. Select desired
code from the list
Lot Size
Data Section Heading
Lot Size Identifies the type of LotSizing that will occur.
O "Replenish to maximum stock -HB" will be used.
Maximumstock level
Maximum stock levelallowed
O Enter value
Roundingvalue
Rounding value for purchase order quantity.
Value to a multiple ofwhich the system rounds up
the procurement quantity.
O Enter value
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 61/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 61
On tab “MRP2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 62/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 62
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Scheduling
Plnd DeliveryTime
Number of days required toobtain material obtainedexternally
O Enter number of days if needed
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 63/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 63
On tab “MRP3”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 64/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 64
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
AvailabilityCheck
Identifies whether totalrequirements by period areto be used or individual
Requirements
R Enter 01 (period) or 02(individual).
NOTE: This is the only
required field on this screen
Preferencedepends uponcompany
Tot. Repl.
Lead Time
Total lead time for finished
product, including production and
procurement along thelongest path
O Enter time in days
Cross project Indicator for cross projectmaterial
O Use pull down menu
Press Enter.
On tab “Forecasting”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
Not Applicable
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
data
Section header
Forecast
model
Indicator that defines on
which forecast model thesystem bases its calculation offuture requirements of the
material.
R Use pull down to change
default value
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 65/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 65
Press Enter.
On tab “Plant data/stor. 1” enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 66/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 66
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
Data
Section Heading
Base Unit of
Measure
Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pull
down list
Defaults from
Basic Data
Unit of Issue Unit in which material is
issued
O Enter Unit of Issue or select
from pull down list
Storage bin Storage bin O Enter value is appropriate
Ph. Inv.Indicator for
cyclecounting
Indicates that the givenmaterial is subject to the
cycle counting method ofinventory. The indicatoralso defines at which timeintervals a physicalinventory is to be carried
out for the material
O Select from pull down menu
Shelf Life
Data
Section Heading
Min. Rem.Shelf Life
Number of days materialneeds to be kept for the
system to accept
O Enter number of days.
Total ShelfLife
Number of days materialwill keep in total
O Enter number of days
PeriodIndicator for
shell life
The period indicatorspecifies the unit of
measurement for a periodof time
O Enter number of days
Old Material Number
Plant Specific Old materialnumber
O Enter Old Material Number
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 67/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 67
On tab “Plant data/stor.2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 68/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 68
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General plant parameters
Section header
Neg. stocksin plant
Negative stocks allowed in plant
O Check box as appropriate
Log.Handling
group
Logistics handling groupfor workload calculation
O Use pull down menu
Serial No.
profile
Serial number profile O Use pull down menu
Dist. Prof Distribution profile of
material in plant
O Use pull down menu
Profit center Profit center R Use pull down menu
Stockdetermin.
Group
The stock determinationgroup combined with the
Stock Determination Ruleat plant level create a key
for the stock determinationstrategy.
O Use pull down menu
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 69/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 69
On tab “Quality management”, enter information in the fields as specified in
the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 70/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 70
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General data Section header
Base Unit ofmeasure
Base unit of measure R defaults from Basic data View
Procurement
data
Section header
Inspection
type
The inspection type defines
how an inspection is performed. Several
inspection types can beassigned to an inspection lotorigin.
O
QM control
key
Control Key for Quality
Management in Procurement
O Use pull down menu
Press Enter.
On tab “Accounting 1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
Not Applicable
On tab “Costing 1” and tab “Costing 2”, Only views will be maintained, no
field will be populated as of now.
Not Applicable
On tab “Plant stock ”, information is displayed regarding the stocks of this
material in this plant: Automatic
Not Applicable
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 71/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 71
On tab “Stor. location stock”, information is displayed regarding the stocks
of this material in this storage location: AutomaticNot Applicable
Save to create the material using the “save” button or use the “Ctrl S” key combination.
To extend a material to add an additional department view:
Access transaction by:
Via Menus (a) Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
Via Transaction Code MM01
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 72/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 72
On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Key identifying material R Enter material number
Industry
Sector
Specifies branch of industry
to which material is assigned
O Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored forthis material
MaterialType
Group to which material isassigned.
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored for
this materialCopy FromMaterial:
Similar material from which thsystemobtains selected values
O Leave blank.
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 73/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 73
Press Enter.
On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes for the
screen(s) to be added.
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 74/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 74
On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed will depend upon the views selected.
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Organizational Levels Section Header
Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will be active or select from pull
down menu
Storage
Location
Storage Location
Identification key
O Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or selectfrom pull down menu
Profiles Section Header
MRPProfile
MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that areindependent of the
Forecast prof.
Forecast profile O Key that allows you to storeforecast parametersindependently of a materialmaster record.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 75/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 75
Press Enter.
Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
this document on page 2).
To extend a material to another plant:
Access transaction by:
Via Menus (a) Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
Via Transaction Code MM01
On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 76/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 76
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Key identifying material R Enter material number
IndustrySector
Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material
MaterialType
Group to which material isassigned.
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material
Copy FromMaterial:
Similar material from which thsystem
obtains selected values
O Leave blank.
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 77/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 77
On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check at least one box other than the
basic data views.
Press Enter .
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 78/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 78
On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter the plant number and other
information in the fields as specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed depends upon the screens selected.
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Organizati
onal Levels
Section Header
Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will be active or select from pulldown menu
Storage
Location
Storage Location
Identification key
O Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or selectfrom pull down menu
Profiles Section Header
MRP
Profile
MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that areindependent of the
Forecast
prof.
Forecast profile O Key that allows you to store
forecast parametersindependently of a materialmaster record.
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 79/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 79
3. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZCN
Overview
A material master is required for a material.
A material needs to have additional department views created.
A new material is to be used in a production process.
A material needs to be extended to another plant.
Requirement for Valuation of material in the Material Master.
A need to define a Production Resource / Tool as a Material.
Business Process Description Overview
Material masters are created when a material required is not defined in the material master. Control ofmaster data depends largely on how each company sets up its Organizational levels - centralized ordecentralized. Some material data is valid for all organizational levels while other data is valid only at
certain levels. (i.e.: client, plant, sales org., etc.). All functional areas of the system use the same materialmaster data. The material master data is defined in individual screens (departmental views) that can be
added as needed. Thus a material can be created with only basic data and other departments can addother information later as it becomes available.
The views possible for material are controlled by the material type selected.
For a material to be used in the system it needs to be created for each plant. Multiple views of a materialare possible but at a minimum, the material needs to have a description and a base unit of measureassigned on the basic data view. Additional department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, MRP)can be added at a later time by extending the material. As additional plants are added, a material willneed to be extended to the plants before it can be used there.
A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions areto be carried out for that PRT.
The information required to be input is dependent upon which department views are being created.
Thus, material master information is typically entered at different times by numerous system users. Note that to add a view, the “Create Material” transaction is used rather than the “Change Material”transaction.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 80/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 80
Input - Required Fields Field Value / Comments
Material Not required as system will assign a new number
Industry Sector Enter T for Telecom Industry
Material Type Press F4 for list of choices. Select “ZCN” for Material Type – Consumable
Base Unit of Measure Enter the inventory unit of measure (Example EA,PC, LB, GA)
Other information Depending upon the views to be created, additional information
will be required
Output - Results Comments New material created Material Created and available for other activities New view added to a material View AddedMaterial extended to a new plant Material extended
BPP Table of Contents
Since a material can have from 1 to more than 30 views depending upon the material type and viewsdesired, a user should select the relevant sections of this document and ignore the views that are notdesired. The procedural steps included in this document are as follows:
Basic Data
Purchasing
Purchase Order Text
MRP
Forecasting
Plant data/storage
Quality mgt.
Accounting
Costing Plant stock
Storage location stock
Extending a material to add a departmental view
Extending a material to another plant
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 81/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 81
Tips and Tricks
If no other view exists, you must enter the base (standard / inventory) Unit of measure anda material description.
Using a reference material (similar characteristics etc.) saves a lot of effort as all the views
will be copied over and can be changed or overwritten.
Note: When creating the MRP Views (or any view for that matter), the Industry Sector and
Material type will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least one
view exists.
The material data can be entered with or without an MRP profile. An MRP profile contains
typical MRP data for a particular procedure. The values can be fixed (cannot be changed) of
default values (can be overridden). The MRP profile simplifies data entry in the master
record. For example if an MRP controller looks after similar material at several plants, a
profile will be defined in the system and assigned to new materials as they are created.
To set user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:
Views:
Menus: Defaults >> Views
Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a new
material.
Select ‘View selection only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to be by-
passed unless selected.
Organizational levels:
Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels
Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a newmaterial.
Select ‘Org. levels/profiles only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to
be by-passed unless selected.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 82/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 82
To extend a material to a different plant requires selecting the new plant on the organizational level
screen. Note that all views of a material are not extended unless they were selected on the initialscreen. In addition, each plant may have a different system configuration requiring additional inputs
on each of the departmental screens. Material changes made in one plant do not change that materialin other plants.
To determine which views of a material need to be added or to see which plants a material has been
extended to, use transaction MM50 (Logistics>Material Management>MaterialMaster>Other>Extend Material View(s)).
Procedure Steps
Access transaction by:
Via Menus
(a) Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediate
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)(d) Logistics> Logistics Execution> Master Data > Material >
Material > Create>Immediately(e) Logistics>Central function >Engineering> Material
>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(f) Accounting>Project Systems > Basic Data > Master Data>Material>Create
(g) Logistics>Environmental Health & Safety> DangerousGoods Management> Environment> Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(h) Logistics>Customer Service > Technical Objects> Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(i) Logistics>Plant Maintenance> TechnicalObjects>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(j) Logistics>Sales & Distribution> Master data >Products >Bill
of Materials> Environment> Material Master >Material >Create (General)
(k) Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
Via Transaction Code MM01
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 83/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 83
On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Key identifying material N/A Leave Blank System will
provide number
Industry
Sector
Specifies branch of industry
to which material is assigned
R Type T(Telecom Industry) or
select from pull down menu
MaterialType
Group to which material isassigned.
R Type ZCN or select from thePull Down Menu
.
Copy FromMaterial:
Similar material from which thsystem obtains selected values.
O Leave blank, unless newmaterial is based on anexisting material
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 84/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 84
On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes
Click on Basic Data 1, and any other views needed.
Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specif ic materi al types
wil l not contain certain views.
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 85/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 85
On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Organizati
onal Levels
Section Header
Plant Plant identification key O Enter Plant where material will
be active or select from pulldown menu
StorageLocation
Storage LocationIdentification key
O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or selectfrom pull down menu
Profiles Section Header
MRPProfile
MRP Parameters C Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that are
independent of the materialmaster record.
Forecast prof.
Forecast profile C Key that allows you to storeforecast parameters
independently of a materialmaster record.
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 86/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 86
On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 1 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 87/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 87
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Material Description R Enter in material description
Base Unitof Measure
Units of measure in whichstocks of the material are
managed
R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list
Material
Group
Key allowing grouping of
same or similar materials
R Enter Material Group
Old
Material Number
Legacy system material numbe
previous SAP material master
O Enter if appropriate
X Plant
Matl Status
Indicates whether the material
may be used within differentdepartments
C Enter if appropriate As of now this
field will not be used.Howeverdepending on
requirement,this can be
used afterimplementation
GenericReq.
Number
Generic Requirement Number O Enter if Appropriate
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 88/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 88
On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 2 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 89/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 89
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Ind. StdDesc.
Description Of TheMaterial in accordance
with the appropriateindustry standard.
OPart Number to be maintained
Document Number of the drawing thatexists for this object.
O Drawing Number to bemaintained.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 90/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 90
On the tab “Purchasing” enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 91/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 91
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Base Unitof Measure
Inventory UOM R Defaults in from Basic Data 1screen.
Not to bechanged orused here
Order Unit UOM for ordering O Enter only if different from
base UOM and required byVendor
If defined
here, orderingunit will becommon forall POs andhence
recommendedto be used atPO level and
not in purchasing
view
Purchasing
Group
Group Responsible for purchas
Material
R Enter or select from pull down li
Material
Group
Group code of like materials R Defaults in from Basic Data 1 sc Not to be
changed orused here
Plantsp.matl
status
Plant specific material status.Determines availability of
Material for purchase or production
O Blank indicates available As of now thisfield will not
be used.
BatchManageme
nt
Identifies the material asmanaged by batch O Check if appropriate It will bemaintained
only for thosematerials forwhich shelf
life needs to be maintained.
Purchasin
g Values
Section Heading
PurchasingValue Key
Identifies follow up intervalsand delivery tolerances
O Select appropriate key from pull down list
Other
Data
Section Heading
GRProcessing
time
Number of days required toinspect and place in storage
O Enter number of days ifrelevant
This will besame for
material type.However it
can be
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 92/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 92
different forindividual
material aswell.
Source List Mandates entry of supplier before PO issues
O Check box if appropriate It will bemaintained forProprietaryItems
Mfr. Partnumber
Manufacturer part number O Enter number if appropriate This field will be used to
capturemanufacturer's
part no. for
proprietaryitems only
Mfr. Manufacturer identifier O Use pull down menu This field will be used in
case of item is proprietary.
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 93/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 93
On tab “Purchase order text” enter appropriate text in the desired languages
and press enter. OPTIONAL
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 94/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 94
On tab “MRP1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 95/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 95
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
Data
Section Heading
Base Unit ofMeasure
Inventory Unit of measure R Enter the inventory unit ofmeasure for this product
Defaults ifBasic Data 1view exists
MRP
Procedure Section Heading
MRP Type Identifies the type of MRP/MPS to be performed
R Mainly, no planning (ND) andmanual reorder point planning
(VB) will be used
After thegeneration of
sufficient datain the SAP,
later onautomaticreorder point
planning (VM)may be
considered.
Reorder point Reorder point O Enter value
MRPController
Code for the personresponsible for MRP/MPS
for this material
O Press F4 for list. Select desiredcode from the list
Lot Size
Data
Section Heading
Lot Size Identifies the type of LotSizing that will occur.
O "Replenish to maximum stock -HB" will be used.
Maximum
stock level
Maximum stock level
allowed
O Enter value
Roundingvalue
Rounding value for purchase order quantity.Value to a multiple of
which the system rounds upthe procurement quantity.
O Enter value
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 96/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 96
On tab “MRP2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 97/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 97
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Scheduling
Plnd DeliveryTime
Number of days required toobtain material obtainedexternally
O Enter number of days if needed
Press Enter.
On tab “MRP3”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 98/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 98
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values CommentsAvailabilityCheck
Identifies whether totalrequirements by period are
to be used or individualRequirements
R Enter 01 (period) or 02(individual).
NOTE: This is the onlyrequired field on this screen
Preferencedepends upon
company
Tot. Repl. Total lead time for finished O Enter time in days
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 99/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 99
Lead Time product, including production and
procurement along thelongest path
Cross project Indicator for cross projectmaterial
O Use pull down menu
Enter.
On tab “Forecasting”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
data
Section header
Forecastmodel
Indicator that defines onwhich forecast model the
system bases its calculation offuture requirements of thematerial.
R Use pull down to changedefault value
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 100/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 100
On tab “Plant data/stor. 1” enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 101/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 101
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
Data Section Heading
Base Unit ofMeasure
Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list
Defaults fromBasic Data
Unit of Issue Unit in which material isissued
O Enter Unit of Issue or selectfrom pull down list
Storage bin Storage bin O Enter value is appropriate
Ph. Inv.Indicator forcycle
counting
Indicates that the givenmaterial is subject to thecycle counting method of
inventory. The indicatoralso defines at which timeintervals a physicalinventory is to be carriedout for the material
O Select from pull down menu
Shelf Life
Data
Section Heading
Min. Rem.
Shelf Life
Number of days material
needs to be kept for the
system to accept
O Enter number of days.
Total ShelfLife
Number of days materialwill keep in total
O Enter number of days
PeriodIndicator forshell life
The period indicatorspecifies the unit ofmeasurement for a period
of time
O Enter number of days
Old Material Number
Plant specific Old Material Number
O Enter Old Material Numbers
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 102/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 102
On tab “Plant data/stor.2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 103/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 103
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General plant parameters
Section header
Neg. stocksin plant
Negative stocks allowed in plant
O Check box as appropriate
Log.Handling
group
Logistics handling groupfor workload calculation
O Use pull down menu
Serial No.
profile
Serial number profile O Use pull down menu
Dist. Prof Distribution profile of
material in plant
O Use pull down menu
Profit center Profit center R Use pull down menu
Stockdetermine.
Group
The stock determinationgroup combined with the
Stock Determination Ruleat plant level create a key
for the stock determinationstrategy.
O Use pull down menu
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 104/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 104
On tab “Quality management”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below table :
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 105/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 105
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General data Section header
Base Unit ofmeasure
Base unit of measure R defaults from Basic data View
Procurement
data
Section header
Inspection
type
The inspection type defines
how an inspection is performed. Several
inspection types can beassigned to an inspection lotorigin.
O
QM control
key
Control Key for Quality
Management in Procurement
O Use pull down menu
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 106/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 106
On tab “Accounting 1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
Data Section Heading
Base Unit ofMeasure
Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list
Defaults fromBasic Data.
ValuationCategory
Indicates whether stocksare valuated together orseparately
O
Current
Valuation
Section Heading
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 107/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 107
ValuationClass
Defines which group ofG/L accounts material is
assigned
R Select from pull down menu tochange default value
Prom. stk val.
Class
Valuation Class for Project
Stock. Default value forthe valuation class forvaluated project stocks ofthe material.
R Use pull down menu
Price Control Defines whether material isvaluated with standard or
moving average price
R „V‟ – Moving Average Price Defaults infrom the
material type.
Mov. Avg.
Price
Moving average price of
the material
C Enter price
Press Enter.
On tab “Costing 1” and tab “Costing 2”, Only views will be maintained, no
field will be populated as of now.
Not Applicable
On tab “Plant stock ”, information is displayed regarding the stocks of this
material in this plant: Automatic
Not Applicable
Press Enter.
On tab “Stor. location stock”, information is displayed regarding the stocks
of this material in this storage location: Automatic
Not Applicable
Save to create the material using the “save” button or use the “Ctrl S” key combination.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 108/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 108
To extend a material to add an additional department view:
Access transaction by:
Via Menus (a) Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>MaterialMaster>Material > Create(General)
Via Transaction Code MM01
On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 109/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 109
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Key identifying material R Enter material number
IndustrySector
Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored for
this material
Material
Type
Group to which material is
assigned.
O Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored forthis material
Copy FromMaterial:
Similar material from which thsystem
obtains selected values
O Leave blank.
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 110/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 110
On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes for the
screen(s) to be added.
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 111/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 111
On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed will depend upon the views selected.
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values CommentsOrganizati
onal Levels
Section Header
Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will
be active or select from pulldown menu
StorageLocation
Storage LocationIdentification key
O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or selectfrom pull down menu
Profiles Section Header
MRPProfile
MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that are
independent of theForecast
prof.
Forecast profile O Key that allows you to store
forecast parametersindependently of a material
master record.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 112/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 112
Press Enter.
Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
this document on page 2).
To extend a material to another plant:
Access transaction by:
Via Menus (a) Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
Via Transaction Code MM01
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 113/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 113
On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Key identifying material R Enter material number
Industry
Sector
Specifies branch of industry
to which material is assigned
O Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored forthis material
MaterialType
Group to which material isassigned.
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored for
this materialCopy FromMaterial:
Similar material from which thsystem
obtains selected values
O Leave blank.
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 114/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 114
Press Enter.
On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check at least one box other than the
basic data views.
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 115/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 115
On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter the plant number and other
information in the fields as specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed depends upon the screens selected.
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Organizational Levels Section Header
Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will be active or select from pull
down menu
StorageLocation
Storage LocationIdentification key
O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or selectfrom pull down menu
Profiles Section Header
MRPProfile
MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that areindependent of the
Forecast prof.
Forecast profile O Key that allows you to storeforecast parametersindependently of a materialmaster record.
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 116/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 116
4. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZCV
Overview
A material master is required for a material.
A material needs to have additional department views created.
A new material is to be used in a production process.
A material needs to be extended to another plant.
Requirement for Valuation of material in the Material Master.
A need to define a Production Resource / Tool as a Material.
Business Process Description Overview
Material masters are created when a material required is not defined in the material master. Control ofmaster data depends largely on how each company sets up its Organizational levels - centralized ordecentralized. Some material data is valid for all organizational levels while other data is valid only at
certain levels. (i.e.: client, plant, sales org., etc.). All functional areas of the system use the same materialmaster data. The material master data is defined in individual screens (departmental views) that can be
added as needed. Thus a material can be created with only basic data and other departments can addother information later as it becomes available.
The views possible for material are controlled by the material type selected.
For a material to be used in the system it needs to be created for each plant. Multiple views of a materialare possible but at a minimum, the material needs to have a description and a base unit of measureassigned on the basic data view. Additional department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, MRP)can be added at a later time by extending the material. As additional plants are added, a material willneed to be extended to the plants before it can be used there.
A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions areto be carried out for that PRT.
The information required to be input is dependent upon which department views are being created.
Thus, material master information is typically entered at different times by numerous system users. Note that to add a view, the “Create Material” transaction is used rather than the “Change Material”transaction.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 117/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 117
Input - Required Fields Field Value / Comments
Material Not required as system will assign a new number
Industry Sector Enter T for Telecom Industry
Material Type Press F4 for list of choices. Select “ZCV” for Material Type – Civil
Base Unit of Measure Enter the inventory unit of measure (Example EA,PC, LB, GA)
Other information Depending upon the views to be created, additional informationwill be required
Output - Results Comments New material created Material Created and available for other activities
New view added to a material View AddedMaterial extended to a new plant Material extended
BPP Table of Contents
Since a material can have from 1 to more than 30 views depending upon the material type and viewsdesired, a user should select the relevant sections of this document and ignore the views that are not
desired. The procedural steps included in this document are as follows:
Basic Data
Purchasing
Purchase Order Text
MRP
Forecasting
Plant data/storage
Quality mgt.
Accounting
Costing Plant stock
Storage location stock
Extending a material to add a departmental view
Extending a material to another plant
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 118/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 118
Tips and Tricks
If no other view exists, you must enter the base (standard / inventory) Unit of measure and
a material description.
Using a reference material (similar characteristics etc.) saves a lot of effort as all the views
will be copied over and can be changed or overwritten.
Note: When creating the MRP Views (or any view for that matter), the Industry Sector and
Material type will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least oneview exists.
The material data can be entered with or without an MRP profile. An MRP profile contains
typical MRP data for a particular procedure. The values can be fixed (cannot be changed) of
default values (can be overridden). The MRP profile simplifies data entry in the master
record. For example if an MRP controller looks after similar material at several plants, a
profile will be defined in the system and assigned to new materials as they are created.
To set user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:
Views:
Menus: Defaults >> Views
Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a new
material.
Select ‘View selection only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to be by-
passed unless selected.
Organizational levels:
Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels
Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a new
material.
Select ‘Org. levels/profiles only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to
be by-passed unless selected.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 119/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 119
To extend a material to a different plant requires selecting the new plant on the organizational levelscreen. Note that all views of a material are not extended unless they were selected on the initial
screen. In addition, each plant may have a different system configuration requiring additional inputson each of the departmental screens. Material changes made in one plant do not change that material
in other plants.
To determine which views of a material need to be added or to see which plants a material has beenextended to, use transaction MM50 (Logistics>Material Management>Material
Master>Other>Extend Material View(s)).
Procedure Steps
Access transaction by:
Via Menus
(a) Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediate
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)(d) Logistics> Logistics Execution> Master Data > Material >
Material > Create>Immediately(e) Logistics>Central function >Engineering> Material
>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(f) Accounting>Project Systems > Basic Data > Master Data>Material>Create
(g) Logistics>Environmental Health & Safety> DangerousGoods Management> Environment> Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(h) Logistics>Customer Service > Technical Objects> Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(i) Logistics>Plant Maintenance> TechnicalObjects>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(j) Logistics>Sales & Distribution> Master data >Products >Bill
of Materials> Environment> Material Master >Material >Create (General)
(k) Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
Via Transaction Code MM01
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 120/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 120
On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Key identifying material N/A Leave Blank System will provide number
IndustrySector
Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned
R Type T(Telecom Industry) orselect from pull down menu
MaterialType
Group to which material isassigned.
R Type ZCV or select from thePull Down Menu
.
Copy FromMaterial:
Similar material from which thsystem obtains selected values.
O Leave blank, unless newmaterial is based on an
existing material
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 121/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 121
On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes
Click on Basic Data 1, and any other views needed.
Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specif ic materi al typeswil l not contain certain views.
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 122/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 122
On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Organizational Levels
Section Header
Plant Plant identification key O Enter Plant where material will be active or select from pulldown menu
StorageLocation
Storage LocationIdentification key
O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or selectfrom pull down menu
Profiles Section Header
MRPProfile
MRP Parameters C Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that areindependent of the material
master record.Forecast
prof.
Forecast profile C Key that allows you to store
forecast parametersindependently of a materialmaster record.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 123/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 123
Press enter.
On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 1 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 124/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 124
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Material Description R Enter in material description
Base Unitof Measure
Units of measure in whichstocks of the material are
managed
R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list
Material
Group
Key allowing grouping of
same or similar materials
R Enter Material Group
Old
Material
Number
Legacy system material numbe
previous SAP material master
O Enter if appropriate
X PlantMatl Status
Indicates whether the materialmay be used within different
departments
C Enter if appropriate As of now thisfield will not
be used.However
depending onrequirement,this can be
used afterimplementatio
n
Generic
Req. Number
Generic Requirement Number O Enter if Appropriate
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 125/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 125
On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 2 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 126/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 126
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Ind. StdDesc.
Description Of TheMaterial in accordance
with the appropriateindustry standard.
OPart Number to be maintained
Document Number of the drawing thatexists for this object.
O Drawing Number to bemaintained.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 127/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 127
On the tab “Purchasing” enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 128/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 128
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Base Unitof Measure
Inventory UOM R Defaults in from Basic Data 1screen.
Not to bechanged orused here
Order Unit UOM for ordering O Enter only if different from
base UOM and required byVendor
If defined
here, orderingunit will becommon forall POs andhence
recommendedto be used atPO level and
not in purchasing
view
Purchasing
Group
Group Responsible for purchas
Material
R Enter or select from pull down li
Material
Group
Group code of like materials R Defaults in from Basic Data 1 sc Not to be
changed orused here
Plantsp.matl
status
Plant specific material status.Determines availability of
Material for purchase or production
O Blank indicates available As of now thisfield will not
be used.
BatchManageme
nt
Identifies the material asmanaged by batch O Check if appropriate It will bemaintained
only for thosematerials forwhich shelf
life needs to be maintained.
Purchasin
g Values
Section Heading
PurchasingValue Key
Identifies follow up intervalsand delivery tolerances
O Select appropriate key from pull down list
Other
Data
Section Heading
GRProcessing
time
Number of days required toinspect and place in storage
O Enter number of days ifrelevant
This will besame for
material type.However it
can be
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 129/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 129
different forindividual
material aswell.
Source List Mandates entry of supplier before PO issues
O Check box if appropriate It will bemaintained forProprietaryItems
Mfr. Partnumber
Manufacturer part number O Enter number if appropriate This field will be used to
capturemanufacturer's
part no. for
proprietaryitems only
Mfr. Manufacturer identifier O Use pull down menu This field will be used in
case of item is proprietary.
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 130/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 130
On tab “Purchase order text” enter appropriate text in the desired languages
and press enter. OPTIONAL
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 131/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 131
On tab “MRP1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 132/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 132
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
Data
Section Heading
Base Unit ofMeasure
Inventory Unit of measure R Enter the inventory unit ofmeasure for this product
Defaults ifBasic Data 1view exists
MRP
Procedure
Section Heading
MRP Type Identifies the type of MRP
/MPS to be performed
R Mainly, no planning (ND) and
manual reorder point planning(VB) will be used
After the
generation ofsufficient data
in the SAP,later onautomatic
reorder point planning (VM)
may beconsidered.
Reorder point Reorder point O Enter value
MRP
Controller
Code for the person
responsible for MRP/MPSfor this material
O Press F4 for list. Select desired
code from the list
Lot Size
Data Section Heading
Lot Size Identifies the type of LotSizing that will occur.
O "Replenish to maximum stock -HB" will be used.
Maximumstock level
Maximum stock levelallowed
O Enter value
Roundingvalue
Rounding value for purchase order quantity.
Value to a multiple ofwhich the system rounds up
the procurement quantity.
O Enter value
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 133/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 133
On tab “MRP2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 134/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 134
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Scheduling
Plnd DeliveryTime
Number of days required toobtain material obtainedexternally
O Enter number of days if needed
Press Enter.
On tab “MRP3”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 135/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 135
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 136/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 136
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
AvailabilityCheck
Identifies whether totalrequirements by period are
to be used or individualRequirements
R Enter 01 (period) or 02(individual).
NOTE: This is the onlyrequired field on this screen
Preferencedepends upon
company
Tot. Repl.Lead Time
Total lead time for finished product, including production and procurement along the
longest path
O Enter time in days
Cross project Indicator for cross project
material
O Use pull down menu
Press Enter.
On tab “Forecasting”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
Not Applicable
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
data
Section header
Forecast
model
Indicator that defines on
which forecast model thesystem bases its calculation offuture requirements of thematerial.
R Use pull down to change
default value
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 137/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 137
On tab “Plant data/stor. 1” enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 138/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 138
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
Data
Section Heading
Base Unit of
Measure
Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pull
down list
Defaults from
Basic Data
Unit of Issue Unit in which material is
issued
O Enter Unit of Issue or select
from pull down list
Storage bin Storage bin O Enter value is appropriate
Ph. Inv.Indicator for
cyclecounting
Indicates that the givenmaterial is subject to the
cycle counting method ofinventory. The indicatoralso defines at which timeintervals a physicalinventory is to be carried
out for the material
O Select from pull down menu
Shelf Life
Data
Section Heading
Min. Rem.Shelf Life
Number of days materialneeds to be kept for the
system to accept
O Enter number of days.
Total ShelfLife
Number of days materialwill keep in total
O Enter number of days
PeriodIndicator for
shell life
The period indicatorspecifies the unit of
measurement for a periodof time
O Enter number of days
Old Material Number
Plant specific Old Material Number
O Enter Old Material Numbers
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 139/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 139
On tab “Plant data/stor.2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 140/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 140
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General plant parameters
Section header
Neg. stocksin plant
Negative stocks allowed in plant
O Check box as appropriate
Log.Handlinggroup
Logistics handling groupfor workload calculation
O Use pull down menu
Serial No. profile
Serial number profile O Use pull down menu
Dist. Prof Distribution profile ofmaterial in plant
O Use pull down menu
Profit center Profit center R Use pull down menu
Stockdetermin.Group
The stock determinationgroup combined with theStock Determination Rule
at plant level create a keyfor the stock determinationstrategy.
O Use pull down menu
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 141/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 141
On tab “Quality management”, enter information in the fields as specified in
the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 142/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 142
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General data Section header
Base Unit of
measure
Base unit of measure R defaults from Basic data View
Procurement
data
Section header
Inspection
type
The inspection type defines
how an inspection is performed. Severalinspection types can beassigned to an inspection lot
origin.
O
QM control
key
Control Key for Quality
Management in Procurement
O Use pull down menu
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 143/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 143
On tab “Accounting 1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
Data Section Heading
Base Unit ofMeasure
Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list
Defaults fromBasic Data.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 144/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 144
ValuationCategory
Indicates whether stocksare valuated together or
separately
O
Current
Valuation
Section Heading
ValuationClass
Defines which group ofG/L accounts material isassigned
R Select from pull down menu tochange default value
Prom. stk val.Class
Valuation Class for ProjectStock. Default value forthe valuation class forvaluated project stocks of
the material.
R Use pull down menu
Price Control Defines whether material is
valuated with standard ormoving average price
R „V‟ – Moving Average Price Defaults in
from thematerial type.
Mov. Avg.Price
Moving average price ofthe material
C Enter price
Press Enter.
On tab “Costing 1” and tab “Costing 2”, Only views will be maintained, no
field will be populated as of now.
Not Applicable
On tab “Plant stock ”, information is displayed regarding the stocks of this
material in this plant: Automatic
Not Applicable
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 145/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 145
On tab “Stor. location stock”, information is displayed regarding the stocks
of this material in this storage location: Automatic
Not Applicable
Save to create the material using the “save” button or use the “Ctrl S” key combination.
To extend a material to add an additional department view:
Access transaction by:
Via Menus (a) Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>MaterialMaster>Material > Create(General)
Via Transaction Code MM01
On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 146/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 146
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Key identifying material R Enter material number
Industry
Sector
Specifies branch of industry
to which material is assigned
O Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored forthis material
MaterialType
Group to which material isassigned.
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored for
this material
Copy From
Material:
Similar material from which th
system
obtains selected values
O Leave blank.
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 147/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 147
On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes for the
screen(s) to be added.
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 148/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 148
On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed will depend upon the views selected.
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values CommentsOrganizati
onal Levels
Section Header
Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will be active or select from pulldown menu
StorageLocation
Storage LocationIdentification key
O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or select
from pull down menu
Profiles Section Header
MRPProfile
MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that are
independent of theForecast
prof.Forecast profile O Key that allows you to store
forecast parametersindependently of a materialmaster record.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 149/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 149
Press Enter.
To extend a material to another plant:
Access transaction by:
Via Menus (a) Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
Via Transaction Code MM01
On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 150/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 150
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Key identifying material R Enter material number
Industry
Sector
Specifies branch of industry
to which material is assigned
O Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored forthis material
MaterialType
Group to which material isassigned.
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored for
this material
Copy From
Material:
Similar material from which th
system
obtains selected values
O Leave blank.
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 151/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 151
On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check at least one box other than the
basic data views.
Press Enter.
On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter the plant number and other
information in the fields as specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed depends upon the screens selected.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 152/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 152
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Organizati
onal Levels
Section Header
Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will
be active or select from pulldown menu
StorageLocation
Storage LocationIdentification key
O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or select
from pull down menuProfiles Section Header
MRPProfile
MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that are
independent of the
Forecast
prof.
Forecast profile O Key that allows you to store
forecast parametersindependently of a material
master record.
Press Enter.
Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
this document on page 2).
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 153/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 153
5. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZEL
Overview
A material master is required for a material.
A material needs to have additional department views created.
A new material is to be used in a production process.
A material needs to be extended to another plant.
Requirement for Valuation of material in the Material Master.
A need to define a Production Resource / Tool as a Material.
Business Process Description Overview
Material masters are created when a material required is not defined in the material master. Control ofmaster data depends largely on how each company sets up its Organizational levels - centralized ordecentralized. Some material data is valid for all organizational levels while other data is valid only at
certain levels. (i.e.: client, plant, sales org., etc.). All functional areas of the system use the same materialmaster data. The material master data is defined in individual screens (departmental views) that can be
added as needed. Thus a material can be created with only basic data and other departments can addother information later as it becomes available.
The views possible for material are controlled by the material type selected.
For a material to be used in the system it needs to be created for each plant. Multiple views of a materialare possible but at a minimum, the material needs to have a description and a base unit of measureassigned on the basic data view. Additional department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, MRP)can be added at a later time by extending the material. As additional plants are added, a material willneed to be extended to the plants before it can be used there.
A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions areto be carried out for that PRT.
The information required to be input is dependent upon which department views are being created.
Thus, material master information is typically entered at different times by numerous system users. Note that to add a view, the “Create Material” transaction is used rather than the “Change Material”transaction.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 154/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 154
Input - Required Fields Field Value / Comments
Material Not required as system will assign a new number
Industry Sector Enter T for Telecom Industry
Material Type Press F4 for list of choices. Select “ZEL” for Material Type – Electrical
Base Unit of Measure Enter the inventory unit of measure (Example EA,PC, LB, GA)
Other information Depending upon the views to be created, additional informationwill be required
Output - Results Comments New material created Material Created and available for other activities New view added to a material View AddedMaterial extended to a new plant Material extended
BPP Table of Contents
Since a material can have from 1 to more than 30 views depending upon the material type and viewsdesired, a user should select the relevant sections of this document and ignore the views that are not
desired. The procedural steps included in this document are as follows:
Basic Data
Purchasing
Purchase Order Text
MRP
Forecasting
Plant data/storage
Quality mgt.
Accounting
Costing
Plant stock
Storage location stock
Extending a material to add a departmental view
Extending a material to another plant
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 155/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 155
Tips and Tricks
If no other view exists, you must enter the base (standard / inventory) Unit of measure anda material description.
Using a reference material (similar characteristics etc.) saves a lot of effort as all the views
will be copied over and can be changed or overwritten.
Note: When creating the MRP Views (or any view for that matter), the Industry Sector and
Material type will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least one
view exists.
The material data can be entered with or without an MRP profile. An MRP profile contains
typical MRP data for a particular procedure. The values can be fixed (cannot be changed) of
default values (can be overridden). The MRP profile simplifies data entry in the master
record. For example if an MRP controller looks after similar material at several plants, a
profile will be defined in the system and assigned to new materials as they are created.
To set user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:
Views:
Menus: Defaults >> Views
Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a new
material.
Select ‘View selection only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to be by-
passed unless selected.
Organizational levels:
Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels
Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a newmaterial.
Select ‘Org. levels/profiles only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to
be by-passed unless selected.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 156/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 156
To extend a material to a different plant requires selecting the new plant on the organizational levelscreen. Note that all views of a material are not extended unless they were selected on the initial
screen. In addition, each plant may have a different system configuration requiring additional inputson each of the departmental screens. Material changes made in one plant do not change that material
in other plants.
To determine which views of a material need to be added or to see which plants a material has beenextended to, use transaction MM50 (Logistics>Material Management>Material
Master>Other>Extend Material View(s)).
Procedure Steps
Access transaction by:
Via Menus
(a) Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediate
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)(d) Logistics> Logistics Execution> Master Data > Material >
Material > Create>Immediately(e) Logistics>Central function >Engineering> Material
>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(f) Accounting>Project Systems > Basic Data > Master Data>Material>Create
(g) Logistics>Environmental Health & Safety> DangerousGoods Management> Environment> Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(h) Logistics>Customer Service > Technical Objects> Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(i) Logistics>Plant Maintenance> TechnicalObjects>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(j) Logistics>Sales & Distribution> Master data >Products >Bill
of Materials> Environment> Material Master >Material >Create (General)
(k) Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
Via Transaction Code MM01
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 157/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 157
On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values CommentsMaterial Key identifying material N/A Leave Blank System will
provide number
Industry
Sector
Specifies branch of industry
to which material is assigned
R Type T(Telecom Industry) or
select from pull down menu
Material
Type
Group to which material is
assigned.
R Type ZEL or select from the
Pull Down Menu
.
Copy From
Material:
Similar material from which th
system obtains selected values.
O Leave blank, unless new
material is based on anexisting material
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 158/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 158
On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes
Click on Basic Data 1, and any other views needed.
Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specif ic materi al types
wil l not contain certain views.
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 159/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 159
On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Organizati
onal Levels
Section Header
Plant Plant identification key O Enter Plant where material will be active or select from pull
down menu
StorageLocation
Storage LocationIdentification key
O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or selectfrom pull down menu
Profiles Section Header
MRP
Profile
MRP Parameters C Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that areindependent of the materialmaster record.
Forecast prof.
Forecast profile C Key that allows you to storeforecast parametersindependently of a material
master record.
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 160/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 160
On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 1 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 161/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 161
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Material Description R Enter in material description
Base Unitof Measure
Units of measure in whichstocks of the material are
managed
R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list
Material
Group
Key allowing grouping of
same or similar materials
R Enter Material Group
Old
Material
Number
Legacy system material numbe
previous SAP material master
O Enter if appropriate
X PlantMatl Status
Indicates whether the materialmay be used within different
departments
C Enter if appropriate As of now thisfield will not
be used.However
depending onrequirement,this can be
used afterimplementatio
n
Generic
Req. Number
Generic Requirement Number O Enter if Appropriate
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 162/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 162
On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 2 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 163/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 163
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Ind. StdDesc.
Description Of TheMaterial in accordance
with the appropriateindustry standard.
OPart Number to be maintained
Document Number of the drawing thatexists for this object.
O Drawing Number to bemaintained.
On the tab “Purchasing” enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 164/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 164
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 165/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 165
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Base Unitof Measure
Inventory UOM R Defaults in from Basic Data 1screen.
Not to bechanged orused here
Order Unit UOM for ordering O Enter only if different from
base UOM and required byVendor
If defined
here, orderingunit will becommon forall POs andhence
recommendedto be used atPO level and
not in purchasing
view
Purchasing
Group
Group Responsible for purchas
Material
R Enter or select from pull down li
Material
Group
Group code of like materials R Defaults in from Basic Data 1 sc Not to be
changed orused here
Plantsp.matl
status
Plant specific material status.Determines availability of
Material for purchase or production
O Blank indicates available As of now thisfield will not
be used.
BatchManageme
nt
Identifies the material asmanaged by batch O Check if appropriate It will bemaintained
only for thosematerials forwhich shelf
life needs to be maintained.
Purchasin
g Values
Section Heading
PurchasingValue Key
Identifies follow up intervalsand delivery tolerances
O Select appropriate key from pull down list
Other
Data
Section Heading
GRProcessing
time
Number of days required toinspect and place in storage
O Enter number of days ifrelevant
This will besame for
material type.However it
can be
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 166/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 166
different forindividual
material aswell.
Source List Mandates entry of supplier before PO issues
O Check box if appropriate It will bemaintained forProprietaryItems
Mfr. Partnumber
Manufacturer part number O Enter number if appropriate This field will be used to
capturemanufacturer's
part no. for
proprietaryitems only
Mfr. Manufacturer identifier O Use pull down menu This field will be used in
case of item is proprietary.
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 167/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 167
On tab “Purchase order text” enter appropriate text in the desired languages
and press enter. OPTIONAL
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 168/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 168
On tab “MRP1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 169/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 169
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
Data
Section Heading
Base Unit of
Measure
Inventory Unit of measure R Enter the inventory unit of
measure for this product
Defaults if
Basic Data 1view exists
MRP
Procedure
Section Heading
MRP Type Identifies the type of MRP
/MPS to be performed
R Mainly, no planning (ND) and
manual reorder point planning(VB) will be used
After the
generation ofsufficient datain the SAP,
later onautomatic
reorder point planning (VM)may be
considered.
Reorder point Reorder point O Enter value
MRP
Controller
Code for the person
responsible for MRP/MPSfor this material
O Press F4 for list. Select desired
code from the list
Lot Size
Data
Section Heading
Lot Size Identifies the type of LotSizing that will occur.
O "Replenish to maximum stock -HB" will be used.
Maximumstock level
Maximum stock levelallowed
O Enter value
Roundingvalue
Rounding value for purchase order quantity.
Value to a multiple ofwhich the system rounds upthe procurement quantity.
O Enter value
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 170/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 170
On tab “MRP2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 171/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 171
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Scheduling
Plnd DeliveryTime
Number of days required toobtain material obtainedexternally
O Enter number of days if needed
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 172/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 172
On tab “MRP3”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 173/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 173
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
AvailabilityCheck
Identifies whether totalrequirements by period areto be used or individual
Requirements
R Enter 01 (period) or 02(individual).
NOTE: This is the only
required field on this screen
Preferencedepends uponcompany
Tot. Repl.Lead Time
Total lead time for finished product, including production and procurement along thelongest path
O Enter time in days
Cross project Indicator for cross projectmaterial
O Use pull down menu
Press Enter.
On tab “Forecasting”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
Not Applicable
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
data
Section header
Forecastmodel
Indicator that defines onwhich forecast model the
system bases its calculation offuture requirements of the
material.
R Use pull down to changedefault value
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 174/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 174
On tab “Plant data/stor. 1” enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 175/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 175
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
Data Section Heading
Base Unit ofMeasure
Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list
Defaults fromBasic Data
Unit of Issue Unit in which material isissued
O Enter Unit of Issue or selectfrom pull down list
Storage bin Storage bin O Enter value is appropriate
Ph. Inv.Indicator for
cyclecounting
Indicates that the givenmaterial is subject to the
cycle counting method ofinventory. The indicator
also defines at which timeintervals a physicalinventory is to be carriedout for the material
O Select from pull down menu
Shelf Life
Data
Section Heading
Min. Rem.Shelf Life
Number of days materialneeds to be kept for thesystem to accept
O Enter number of days.
Total Shelf
Life
Number of days material
will keep in total
O Enter number of days
PeriodIndicator for
shell life
The period indicatorspecifies the unit of
measurement for a periodof time
O Enter number of days
Old Material Number
Plant specific Old Material Number
O Enter Old Material Numbers
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 176/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 176
On tab “Plant data/stor.2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 177/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 177
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General plant parameters
Section header
Neg. stocksin plant
Negative stocks allowed in plant
O Check box as appropriate
Log.Handling
group
Logistics handling groupfor workload calculation
O Use pull down menu
Serial No.
profile
Serial number profile O Use pull down menu
Dist. Prof Distribution profile of
material in plant
O Use pull down menu
Profit center Profit center R Use pull down menu
Stockdetermination
Group
The stock determinationgroup combined with the
Stock Determination Ruleat plant level create a key
for the stock determinationstrategy.
O Use pull down menu
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 178/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 178
On tab “Quality management”, enter information in the fields as specified in
the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 179/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 179
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General data Section header
Base Unit of
measure
Base unit of measure R defaults from Basic data View
Procurement
data
Section header
Inspection
type
The inspection type defines
how an inspection is performed. Severalinspection types can beassigned to an inspection lot
origin.
O
QM control
key
Control Key for Quality
Management in Procurement
O Use pull down menu
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 180/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 180
On tab “Accounting 1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 181/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 181
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
Data
Section Heading
Base Unit ofMeasure
Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list
Defaults fromBasic Data.
ValuationCategory
Indicates whether stocksare valuated together orseparately
O
Current
Valuation
Section Heading
Valuation
Class
Defines which group of
G/L accounts material isassigned
R Select from pull down menu to
change default value
Prom. stk val.Class
Valuation Class for ProjectStock. Default value for
the valuation class forvaluated project stocks ofthe material.
R Use pull down menu
Price Control Defines whether material isvaluated with standard ormoving average price
R „V‟ – Moving Average Price Defaults infrom thematerial type.
Mov. Avg.Price
Moving average price ofthe material
C Enter price
Press Enter.
On tab “Costing 1” and tab “Costing 2”, Only views will be maintained, no
field will be populated as of now.
Not Applicable
On tab “Plant stock ”, information is displayed regarding the stocks of this
material in this plant: Automatic
Not Applicable
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 182/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 182
On tab “Stor. location stock”, information is displayed regarding the stocks
of this material in this storage location: Automatic
Not Applicable
Save to create the material using the “save” button or use the “Ctrl S” key combination.
To extend a material to add an additional department view:
Access transaction by:
Via Menus (a) Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
Via Transaction Code MM01
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 183/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 183
On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Key identifying material R Enter material number
IndustrySector
Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material
MaterialType
Group to which material isassigned.
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored for
this material
Copy FromMaterial:
Similar material from which thsystemobtains selected values
O Leave blank.
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 184/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 184
On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes for the
screen(s) to be added.
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 185/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 185
On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed will depend upon the views selected.
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values CommentsOrganizati
onal Levels
Section Header
Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will be active or select from pulldown menu
StorageLocation
Storage LocationIdentification key
O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or select
from pull down menu
Profiles Section Header
MRPProfile
MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that are
independent of theForecast
prof.Forecast profile O Key that allows you to store
forecast parametersindependently of a materialmaster record.
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 186/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 186
Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
this document on page 2).
To extend a material to another plant:
Access transaction by:
Via Menus (a) Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
Via Transaction Code MM01
On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 187/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 187
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Key identifying material R Enter material number
Industry
Sector
Specifies branch of industry
to which material is assigned
O Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored forthis material
MaterialType
Group to which material isassigned.
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material
Copy FromMaterial:
Similar material from which thsystemobtains selected values
O Leave blank.
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 188/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 188
On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check at least one box other than the
basic data views.
Enter.
On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter the plant number and other
information in the fields as specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed depends upon the screens selected.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 189/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 189
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Organizati
onal Levels
Section Header
Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will
be active or select from pulldown menu
StorageLocation
Storage LocationIdentification key
O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or select
from pull down menu
Profiles Section Header
MRPProfile MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that are
independent of the
Forecast
prof.
Forecast profile O Key that allows you to store
forecast parametersindependently of a material
master record.
Press Enter.
Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents forthi s document on page 2).
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 190/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 190
6. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZFGN
Overview
A material master is required for a material.
A material needs to have additional department views created.
A new material is to be used in a production process.
A material needs to be extended to another plant.
Requirement for Valuation of material in the Material Master.
A need to define a Production Resource / Tool as a Material.
Business Process Description Overview
Material masters are created when a material required is not defined in the material master. Control ofmaster data depends largely on how each company sets up its Organizational levels - centralized ordecentralized. Some material data is valid for all organizational levels while other data is valid only at
certain levels. (i.e.: client, plant, sales org., etc.). All functional areas of the system use the same materialmaster data. The material master data is defined in individual screens (departmental views) that can be
added as needed. Thus a material can be created with only basic data and other departments can addother information later as it becomes available.
The views possible for material are controlled by the material type selected.
For a material to be used in the system it needs to be created for each plant. Multiple views of a materialare possible but at a minimum, the material needs to have a description and a base unit of measureassigned on the basic data view. Additional department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, MRP)can be added at a later time by extending the material. As additional plants are added, a material willneed to be extended to the plants before it can be used there.
A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions areto be carried out for that PRT.
The information required to be input is dependent upon which department views are being created.
Thus, material master information is typically entered at different times by numerous system users. Note that to add a view, the “Create Material” transaction is used rather than the “Change Material”transaction.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 191/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 191
Input - Required Fields Field Value / Comments
Material Not required as system will assign a new number
Industry Sector Enter T for Telecom Industry
Material Type Press F4 for list of choices. Select “ZFGN” for Material Type – Finished Goods
Base Unit of Measure Enter the inventory unit of measure (Example EA,PC, LB, GA)
Other information Depending upon the views to be created, additional informationwill be required
Output - Results Comments New material created Material Created and available for other activities New view added to a material View AddedMaterial extended to a new plant Material extended
BPP Table of Contents
Since a material can have from 1 to more than 30 views depending upon the material type and viewsdesired, a user should select the relevant sections of this document and ignore the views that are not
desired. The procedural steps included in this document are as follows:
Basic Data
Purchasing
Purchase Order Text
MRP
Forecasting
Plant data/storage
Quality mgt.
Accounting
Costing
Plant stock
Storage location stock
Extending a material to add a departmental view
Extending a material to another plant
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 192/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 192
Tips and Tricks
If no other view exists, you must enter the base (standard / inventory) Unit of measure and
a material description.
Using a reference material (similar characteristics etc.) saves a lot of effort as all the views
will be copied over and can be changed or overwritten.
Note: When creating the MRP Views (or any view for that matter), the Industry Sector and
Material type will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least oneview exists.
The material data can be entered with or without an MRP profile. An MRP profile contains
typical MRP data for a particular procedure. The values can be fixed (cannot be changed) of
default values (can be overridden). The MRP profile simplifies data entry in the master
record. For example if an MRP controller looks after similar material at several plants, a
profile will be defined in the system and assigned to new materials as they are created.
To set user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:
Views:
Menus: Defaults >> Views
Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a new
material.
Select ‘View selection only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to be by-
passed unless selected.
Organizational levels:
Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels
Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a new
material.
Select ‘Org. levels/profiles only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to
be by-passed unless selected.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 193/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 193
To extend a material to a different plant requires selecting the new plant on the organizational levelscreen. Note that all views of a material are not extended unless they were selected on the initial
screen. In addition, each plant may have a different system configuration requiring additional inputson each of the departmental screens. Material changes made in one plant do not change that material
in other plants.
To determine which views of a material need to be added or to see which plants a material has beenextended to, use transaction MM50 (Logistics>Material Management>Material
Master>Other>Extend Material View(s)).
Procedure Steps
Access transaction by:
Via Menus
(a) Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediate
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)(d) Logistics> Logistics Execution> Master Data > Material >
Material > Create>Immediately(e) Logistics>Central function >Engineering> Material
>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(f) Accounting>Project Systems > Basic Data > Master Data>Material>Create
(g) Logistics>Environmental Health & Safety> DangerousGoods Management> Environment> Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(h) Logistics>Customer Service > Technical Objects> Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(i) Logistics>Plant Maintenance> TechnicalObjects>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(j) Logistics>Sales & Distribution> Master data >Products >Bill
of Materials> Environment> Material Master >Material >Create (General)
(k) Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
Via Transaction Code MM01
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 194/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 194
On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values CommentsMaterial Key identifying material N/A Leave Blank System will
provide number
IndustrySector
Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned
R Type T(Telecom Industry) orselect from pull down menu
MaterialType
Group to which material isassigned.
R Type Finished Goods or selectfrom the Pull Down Menu
.
Copy FromMaterial:
Similar material from which thsystem obtains selected values.
O Leave blank, unless newmaterial is based on anexisting material
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 195/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 195
On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes
Click on Basic Data 1, and any other views needed.
Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specif ic material types
wil l not contain certain views.
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 196/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 196
On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Organizati
onal Levels
Section Header
Plant Plant identification key O Enter Plant where material will be active or select from pull
down menuStorageLocation
Storage LocationIdentification key
O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or selectfrom pull down menu
Profiles Section Header
MRPProfile
MRP Parameters C Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that areindependent of the material
master record.
Forecast
prof.
Forecast profile C Key that allows you to store
forecast parametersindependently of a material
master record.
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 197/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 197
On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 1 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 198/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 198
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Material Description R Enter in material description
Base Unit
of Measure
Units of measure in which
stocks of the material aremanaged
R Enter UOM or select from pull
down list
MaterialGroup
Key allowing grouping ofsame or similar materials
R Enter Material Group
OldMaterial
Number
Legacy system material numbe previous SAP material master
O Enter if appropriate
X PlantMatl Status
Indicates whether the materialmay be used within differentdepartments
C Enter if appropriate As of now thisfield will not
be used.
Howeverdepending onrequirement,this can beused after
implementation
Generic
Req. Number
Generic Requirement Number O Enter if Appropriate
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 199/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 199
On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 2 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 200/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 200
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Ind. Std
Desc.
Description Of The
Material in accordancewith the appropriateindustry standard.
O
Part Number to be maintained
Document Number of the drawing thatexists for this object.
O Drawing Number to bemaintained.
On the tab “Purchasing” enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 201/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 201
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Base Unit
of Measure
Inventory UOM R Defaults in from Basic Data 1
screen.
Not to be
changed orused here
Order Unit UOM for ordering O Enter only if different from base UOM and required byVendor
If definedhere, orderingunit will be
common for
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 202/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 202
all POs andhence
recommendedto be used at
PO level andnot in
purchasing
view
PurchasingGroup
Group Responsible for purchasMaterial
R Enter or select from pull down li
MaterialGroup
Group code of like materials R Defaults in from Basic Data 1 sc Not to bechanged orused here
Plantsp.matl
status
Plant specific material status.Determines availability of
Material for purchase or production
O Blank indicates available As of now thisfield will not
be used.
BatchManageme
nt
Identifies the material asmanaged by batch
O Check if appropriate It will bemaintained
only for thosematerials for
which shelflife needs to
be maintained.
Purchasin
g Values
Section Heading
Purchasing
Value Key
Identifies follow up intervals
and delivery tolerances
O Select appropriate key from
pull down list
Other
Data
Section Heading
GR
Processingtime
Number of days required to
inspect and place in storage
O Enter number of days if
relevant
This will be
same formaterial type.However itcan bedifferent for
individual
material aswell.
Source List Mandates entry of supplier
before PO issues
O Check box if appropriate It will be
maintained forProprietaryItems
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 203/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 203
Mfr. Partnumber
Manufacturer part number O Enter number if appropriate This field will be used to
capturemanufacturer's
part no. for proprietaryitems only
Mfr. Manufacturer identifier O Use pull down menu This field will
be used incase of item is
proprietary.
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 204/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 204
On tab “Purchase order text” enter appropriate text in the desired languages
and press enter. OPTIONAL
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 205/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 205
On tab “MRP1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 206/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 206
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
Data
Section Heading
Base Unit ofMeasure
Inventory Unit of measure R Enter the inventory unit ofmeasure for this product
Defaults ifBasic Data 1view exists
MRP
Procedure
Section Heading
MRP Type Identifies the type of MRP/MPS to be performed
R Mainly, no planning (ND) andmanual reorder point planning(VB) will be used
After thegeneration ofsufficient data
in the SAP,later on
automaticreorder point
planning (VM)
may beconsidered.
Reorder point Reorder point O Enter value
MRP
Controller
Code for the person
responsible for MRP/MPSfor this material
O Press F4 for list. Select desired
code from the list
Lot SizeData Section Heading
Lot Size Identifies the type of LotSizing that will occur.
O "Replenish to maximum stock -HB" will be used.
Maximumstock level
Maximum stock levelallowed
O Enter value
Roundingvalue
Rounding value for purchase order quantity.Value to a multiple ofwhich the system rounds up
the procurement quantity.
O Enter value
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 207/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 207
On tab “MRP2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 208/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 208
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Scheduling
Plnd Delivery
Time
Number of days required to
obtain material obtainedexternally
O Enter number of days if needed
Enter
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 209/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 209
On tab “MRP3”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 210/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 210
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
AvailabilityCheck
Identifies whether totalrequirements by period areto be used or individual
Requirements
R Enter 01 (period) or 02(individual).
NOTE: This is the only
required field on this screen
Preferencedepends uponcompany
Tot. Repl.Lead Time
Total lead time for finished product, including production and procurement along thelongest path
O Enter time in days
Cross project Indicator for cross projectmaterial
O Use pull down menu
Enter.
On tab “Forecasting”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
Not Applicable
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Generaldata
Section header
Forecastmodel
Indicator that defines onwhich forecast model the
system bases its calculation offuture requirements of thematerial.
R Use pull down to changedefault value
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 211/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 211
On tab “Plant data/stor. 1” enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 212/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 212
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
Data
Section Heading
Base Unit of
Measure
Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pull
down list
Defaults from
Basic Data
Unit of Issue Unit in which material is
issued
O Enter Unit of Issue or select
from pull down list
Storage bin Storage bin O Enter value is appropriate
Ph. Inv.Indicator for
cyclecounting
Indicates that the givenmaterial is subject to the
cycle counting method ofinventory. The indicator
also defines at which timeintervals a physicalinventory is to be carried
out for the material
O Select from pull down menu
Shelf Life
Data
Section Heading
Min. Rem.
Shelf Life
Number of days material
needs to be kept for thesystem to accept
O Enter number of days.
Total ShelfLife
Number of days materialwill keep in total
O Enter number of days
Period
Indicator forshell life
The period indicator
specifies the unit ofmeasurement for a periodof time
O Enter number of days
Old Material Number
Plant specific Old Material Number
O Enter Old Material Numbers
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 213/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 213
On tab “Plant data/stor.2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 214/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 214
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General plant parameters
Section header
Neg. stocksin plant
Negative stocks allowed in plant
O Check box as appropriate
Log.Handling
group
Logistics handling groupfor workload calculation
O Use pull down menu
Serial No.
profile
Serial number profile O Use pull down menu
Dist. Prof Distribution profile of
material in plant
O Use pull down menu
Profit center Profit center R Use pull down menu
Stockdetermination
Group
The stock determinationgroup combined with the
Stock Determination Ruleat plant level create a key
for the stock determinationstrategy.
O Use pull down menu
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 215/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 215
On tab “Quality management”, enter information in the fields as specified in
the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 216/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 216
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General data Section header
Base Unit ofmeasure
Base unit of measure R defaults from Basic data View
Procurement
data
Section header
Inspection
type
The inspection type defines
how an inspection is performed. Several
inspection types can beassigned to an inspection lotorigin.
O
QM control
key
Control Key for Quality
Management in Procurement
O Use pull down menu
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 217/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 217
On tab “Accounting 1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 218/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 218
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
Data Section Heading
Base Unit ofMeasure
Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list
Defaults fromBasic Data.
ValuationCategory
Indicates whether stocksare valuated together or
separately
R Press F4 to call the menu list
Current
Valuation
Section Heading
Valuation
Class
Defines which group of
G/L accounts material isassigned
R Select from pull down menu to
change default value
Prom. stk val.Class Valuation Class for ProjectStock. Default value forthe valuation class forvaluated project stocks ofthe material.
R Use pull down menu
Price Control Defines whether material isvaluated with standard or
moving average price
R „V‟ – Moving Average Price Defaults infrom the
material type.
Mov. Avg.Price
Moving average price ofthe material
C Enter price
Enter.
On tab “Costing 1” and tab “Costing 2”, Only views will be maintained, no
field will be populated as of now.
Not Applicable
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 219/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 219
On tab “Plant stock ”, information is displayed regarding the stocks of this
material in this plant: Automatic
Not Applicable
Enter.
On tab “Stor. location stock”, information is displayed regarding the stocks
of this material in this storage location: Automatic
Not Applicable
Save to create the material using the “save” button or use the “Ctrl S” key combination.
To extend a material to add an additional department view:
Access transaction by:
Via Menus (a) Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
Via Transaction Code MM01
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 220/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 220
On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Key identifying material R Enter material number
IndustrySector
Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material
MaterialType
Group to which material isassigned.
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material
Copy FromMaterial:
Similar material from which thsystem
obtains selected values
O Leave blank.
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 221/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 221
Press Enter.
On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes for the
screen(s) to be added.
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 222/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 222
On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed will depend upon the views selected.
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values CommentsOrganizati
onal Levels
Section Header
Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will be active or select from pulldown menu
StorageLocation
Storage LocationIdentification key
O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or select
from pull down menu
Profiles Section Header
MRPProfile
MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that are
independent of theForecast
prof.Forecast profile O Key that allows you to store
forecast parametersindependently of a materialmaster record.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 223/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 223
Enter.
Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
this document on page 2).
To extend a material to another plant:
Access transaction by:
Via Menus (a) Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>MaterialMaster>Material > Create(General)
Via Transaction Code MM01
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 224/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 224
On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Key identifying material R Enter material number
IndustrySector
Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored for
this material
Material
Type
Group to which material is
assigned.
O Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored forthis material
Copy FromMaterial:
Similar material from which thsystemobtains selected values
O Leave blank.
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 225/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 225
On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check at least one box other than the
basic data views.
Enter.
On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter the plant number and other
information in the fields as specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed depends upon the screens selected.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 226/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 226
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Organizati
onal Levels
Section Header
Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will
be active or select from pulldown menu
StorageLocation
Storage LocationIdentification key
O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or select
from pull down menuProfiles Section Header
MRPProfile
MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that are
independent of the
Forecast
prof.
Forecast profile O Key that allows you to store
forecast parametersindependently of a material
master record.
Enter.
Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
th is document on above pages).
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 227/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 227
7. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZFGS
Overview
A material master is required for a material.
A material needs to have additional department views created.
A new material is to be used in a production process.
A material needs to be extended to another plant.
Requirement for Valuation of material in the Material Master.
A need to define a Production Resource / Tool as a Material.
Business Process Description Overview
Material masters are created when a material required is not defined in the material master. Control ofmaster data depends largely on how each company sets up its Organizational levels - centralized ordecentralized. Some material data is valid for all organizational levels while other data is valid only at
certain levels. (i.e.: client, plant, sales org., etc.). All functional areas of the system use the same materialmaster data. The material master data is defined in individual screens (departmental views) that can be
added as needed. Thus a material can be created with only basic data and other departments can addother information later as it becomes available.
The views possible for material are controlled by the material type selected.
For a material to be used in the system it needs to be created for each plant. Multiple views of a materialare possible but at a minimum, the material needs to have a description and a base unit of measureassigned on the basic data view. Additional department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, MRP)can be added at a later time by extending the material. As additional plants are added, a material willneed to be extended to the plants before it can be used there.
A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions areto be carried out for that PRT.
The information required to be input is dependent upon which department views are being created.
Thus, material master information is typically entered at different times by numerous system users. Note that to add a view, the “Create Material” transaction is used rather than the “Change Material”transaction.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 228/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 228
Input - Required Fields Field Value / Comments
Material Not required as system will assign a new number
Industry Sector Enter T for Telecom Industry
Material Type Press F4 for list of choices. Select “ZFGS” for Material Type – Serialized Finished Goods
Base Unit of Measure Enter the inventory unit of measure (Example EA,PC, LB, GA)
Other information Depending upon the views to be created, additional informationwill be required
Output - Results Comments New material created Material Created and available for other activities New view added to a material View AddedMaterial extended to a new plant Material extended
BPP Table of Contents
A material can have from 1 to more than 30 views depending upon the material type and viewsdesired, a user should select the relevant sections of this document and ignore the views that are not
desired. The procedural steps included in this document are as follows:
Basic Data
Purchasing
Purchase Order Text
MRP
Forecasting
Plant data/storage
Quality mgt.
Accounting
Costing
Plant stock
Storage location stock
Extending a material to add a departmental view
Extending a material to another plant
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 229/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 229
Tips and Tricks
If no other view exists, you must enter the base (standard / inventory) Unit of measure and a
material description.
Using a reference material (similar characteristics etc.) saves a lot of effort as all the views will be
copied over and can be changed or overwritten.
Note: When creating the MRP Views (or any view for that matter), the Industry Sector and Material
type will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least one view exists.
The material data can be entered with or without an MRP profile. An MRP profile contains typical
MRP data for a particular procedure. The values can be fixed (cannot be changed) of default values
(can be overridden). The MRP profile simplifies data entry in the master record. For example if an
MRP controller looks after similar material at several plants, a profile will be defined in the system
and assigned to new materials as they are created.
To set user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:
Views:
Menus: Defaults >> Views
Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a new
material.
Select ‘View selection only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to be by-
passed unless selected.
Organizational levels:
Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a new
material.
Select ‘Org. levels/profiles only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to
be by-passed unless selected.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 230/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 230
To extend a material to a different plant requires selecting the new plant on the organizational levelscreen. Note that all views of a material are not extended unless they were selected on the initial
screen. In addition, each plant may have a different system configuration requiring additional inputson each of the departmental screens. Material changes made in one plant do not change that material
in other plants.
To determine which views of a material need to be added or to see which plants a material has beenextended to, use transaction MM50 (Logistics>Material Management>Material
Master>Other>Extend Material View(s)).
Procedure Steps
Access transaction by:
Via Menus
(a) Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediate
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)(d) Logistics> Logistics Execution> Master Data > Material >
Material > Create>Immediately(e) Logistics>Central function >Engineering> Material
>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(f) Accounting>Project Systems > Basic Data > Master Data>Material>Create
(g) Logistics>Environmental Health & Safety> DangerousGoods Management> Environment> Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(h) Logistics>Customer Service > Technical Objects> Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(i) Logistics>Plant Maintenance> TechnicalObjects>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(j) Logistics>Sales & Distribution> Master data >Products >Bill
of Materials> Environment> Material Master >Material >Create (General)
(k) Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
Via Transaction Code MM01
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 231/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 231
On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Key identifying material N/A Leave Blank System will
provide number
Industry
Sector
Specifies branch of industry
to which material is assigned
R Type T(Telecom Industry) or
select from pull down menu
MaterialType
Group to which material isassigned.
R Type Serialized FinishedGoods or select from the PullDown Menu
.
Copy FromMaterial:
Similar material from which thsystem obtains selected values.
O Leave blank, unless newmaterial is based on an
existing material
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 232/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 232
On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes
Click on Basic Data 1, and any other views needed.
Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specif ic material types
wil l not contain certain views.
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 233/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 233
On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Organizati
onal Levels
Section Header
Plant Plant identification key O Enter Plant where material will
be active or select from pulldown menu
StorageLocation
Storage LocationIdentification key
O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or select
from pull down menu
Profiles Section Header
MRPProfile
MRP Parameters C Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that are
independent of the materialmaster record.
Forecast prof.
Forecast profile C Key that allows you to storeforecast parameters
independently of a materialmaster record.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 234/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 234
Enter.
On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 1 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 235/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 235
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Material Description R Enter in material description
Base Unitof Measure
Units of measure in whichstocks of the material are
managed
R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list
Material
Group
Key allowing grouping of
same or similar materials
R Enter Material Group
Old
Material
Number
Legacy system material numbe
previous SAP material master
O Enter if appropriate
X PlantMatl Status
Indicates whether the materialmay be used within different
departments
C Enter if appropriate As of now thisfield will not
be used.However
depending onrequirement,this can be
used afterimplementatio
n
Generic
Req. Number
Generic Requirement Number O Enter if Appropriate
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 236/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 236
On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 2 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 237/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 237
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Ind. StdDesc.
Description Of TheMaterial in accordancewith the appropriateindustry standard.
OPart Number to be maintained
Document Number of the drawing thatexists for this object.
O Drawing Number to bemaintained.
On the tab “Purchasing” enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 238/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 238
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 239/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 239
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Base Unitof Measure
Inventory UOM R Defaults in from Basic Data 1screen.
Not to bechanged orused here
Order Unit UOM for ordering O Enter only if different from
base UOM and required byVendor
If defined
here, orderingunit will becommon forall POs andhence
recommendedto be used atPO level and
not in purchasing
view
Purchasing
Group
Group Responsible for purchas
Material
R Enter or select from pull down li
Material
Group
Group code of like materials R Defaults in from Basic Data 1 sc Not to be
changed orused here
Plantsp.matl
status
Plant specific material status.Determines availability of
Material for purchase or production
O Blank indicates available As of now thisfield will not
be used.
BatchManageme
nt
Identifies the material asmanaged by batch O Check if appropriate It will bemaintained
only for thosematerials forwhich shelf
life needs to be maintained.
Purchasin
g Values
Section Heading
PurchasingValue Key
Identifies follow up intervalsand delivery tolerances
O Select appropriate key from pull down list
Other
Data
Section Heading
GRProcessing
time
Number of days required toinspect and place in storage
O Enter number of days ifrelevant
This will besame for
material type.However it
can be
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 240/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 240
different forindividual
material aswell.
Source List Mandates entry of supplier before PO issues
O Check box if appropriate It will bemaintained forProprietaryItems
Mfr. Partnumber
Manufacturer part number O Enter number if appropriate This field will be used to
capturemanufacturer's
part no. for
proprietaryitems only
Mfr. Manufacturer identifier O Use pull down menu This field will be used in
case of item is proprietary.
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 241/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 241
On tab “Purchase order text” enter appropriate text in the desired languages
and press enter. OPTIONAL
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 242/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 242
On tab “MRP1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 243/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 243
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
Data Section Heading
Base Unit ofMeasure
Inventory Unit of measure R Enter the inventory unit ofmeasure for this product
Defaults ifBasic Data 1
view exists
MRP
Procedure Section Heading
MRP Type Identifies the type of MRP/MPS to be performed
R Mainly, no planning (ND) andmanual reorder point planning(VB) will be used
After thegeneration ofsufficient datain the SAP,later on
automaticreorder point
planning (VM)may beconsidered.
Reorder point Reorder point O Enter value
MRPController
Code for the personresponsible for MRP/MPSfor this material
O Press F4 for list. Select desiredcode from the list
Lot Size
Data
Section Heading
Lot Size Identifies the type of LotSizing that will occur. O "Replenish to maximum stock -HB" will be used.
Maximum
stock level
Maximum stock level
allowed
O Enter value
Rounding
value
Rounding value for
purchase order quantity.Value to a multiple ofwhich the system rounds upthe procurement quantity.
O Enter value
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 244/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 244
On tab “MRP2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 245/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 245
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Scheduling
Plnd DeliveryTime
Number of days required toobtain material obtainedexternally
O Enter number of days if needed
Enter
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 246/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 246
On tab “MRP3”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 247/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 247
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
AvailabilityCheck
Identifies whether totalrequirements by period areto be used or individual
Requirements
R Enter 01 (period) or 02(individual).
NOTE: This is the only
required field on this screen
Preferencedepends uponcompany
Tot. Repl.Lead Time
Total lead time for finished product, including production and procurement along thelongest path
O Enter time in days
Cross project Indicator for cross projectmaterial
O Use pull down menu
Enter.
On tab “Forecasting”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
Not Applicable
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
data
Section header
Forecastmodel
Indicator that defines onwhich forecast model the
system bases its calculation offuture requirements of thematerial.
R Use pull down to changedefault value
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 248/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 248
On tab “Plant data/stor. 1” enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 249/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 249
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
Data
Section Heading
Base Unit ofMeasure
Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list
Defaults fromBasic Data
Unit of Issue Unit in which material isissued
O Enter Unit of Issue or selectfrom pull down list
Storage bin Storage bin O Enter value is appropriate
Ph. Inv.Indicator forcycle
counting
Indicates that the givenmaterial is subject to thecycle counting method of
inventory. The indicatoralso defines at which time
intervals a physicalinventory is to be carriedout for the material
O Select from pull down menu
Shelf Life
Data Section Heading
Min. Rem.Shelf Life
Number of days materialneeds to be kept for thesystem to accept
O Enter number of days.
Total ShelfLife
Number of days materialwill keep in total
O Enter number of days
PeriodIndicator forshell life
The period indicatorspecifies the unit ofmeasurement for a period
of time
O Enter number of days
Old Material Number
Plant specific Old Material Number
O Enter Old Material Numbers
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 250/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 250
On tab “Plant data/stor.2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 251/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 251
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General plant parameters
Section header
Neg. stocksin plant
Negative stocks allowed in plant
O Check box as appropriate
Log.Handling
group
Logistics handling groupfor workload calculation
O Use pull down menu
Serial No.
profile
Serial number profile O Use pull down menu
Dist. Prof Distribution profile of
material in plant
O Use pull down menu
Profit center Profit center R Use pull down menu
Stockdetermination
Group
The stock determinationgroup combined with the
Stock Determination Ruleat plant level create a key
for the stock determinationstrategy.
O Use pull down menu
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 252/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 252
On tab “Quality management”, enter information in the fields as specified in
the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 253/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 253
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General data Section header
Base Unit ofmeasure
Base unit of measure R defaults from Basic data View
Procurement
data
Section header
Inspection
type
The inspection type defines
how an inspection is performed. Several
inspection types can beassigned to an inspection lotorigin.
O
QM control
key
Control Key for Quality
Management in Procurement
O Use pull down menu
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 254/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 254
On tab “Accounting 1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 255/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 255
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
Data Section Heading
Base Unit ofMeasure
Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list
Defaults fromBasic Data.
ValuationCategory
Indicates whether stocksare valuated together or
separately
R Press F4 to call the menu list
Current
Valuation
Section Heading
Valuation
Class
Defines which group of
G/L accounts material isassigned
R Select from pull down menu to
change default value
Prom. stk val.Class Valuation Class for ProjectStock. Default value forthe valuation class forvaluated project stocks ofthe material.
R Use pull down menu
Price Control Defines whether material isvaluated with standard or
moving average price
R „V‟ – Moving Average Price Defaults infrom the
material type.
Mov. Avg.Price
Moving average price ofthe material
C Enter price
Enter.
On tab “Costing 1” and tab “Costing 2”, Only views will be maintained, no
field will be populated as of now.
Not Applicable
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 256/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 256
On tab “Plant stock ”, information is displayed regarding the stocks of this
material in this plant: Automatic
Not Applicable
Enter.
On tab “Stor. location stock”, information is displayed regarding the stocks
of this material in this storage location: Automatic
Not Applicable
Save to create the material using the “save” button or use the “Ctrl S” key combination.
To extend a material to add an additional department view:
Access transaction by:
Via Menus (a) Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
Via Transaction Code MM01
On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 257/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 257
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Key identifying material R Enter material number
IndustrySector
Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored for
this materialMaterialType
Group to which material isassigned.
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored for
this material
Copy FromMaterial:
Similar material from which thsystemobtains selected values
O Leave blank.
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 258/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 258
On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes for the
screen(s) to be added.
Enter.
On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed will depend upon the views selected.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 259/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 259
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Organizati
onal Levels
Section Header
Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will be active or select from pull
down menu
StorageLocation
Storage LocationIdentification key
O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or select
from pull down menuProfiles Section Header
MRPProfile
MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that areindependent of the
Forecast
prof.
Forecast profile O Key that allows you to store
forecast parametersindependently of a materialmaster record.
Enter.
Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
this document on page 2).
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 260/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 260
To extend a material to another plant:
Access transaction by:
Via Menus (a) Logistics>Material Management>Material
master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>MaterialMaster>Material > Create(General)
Via Transaction Code MM01
On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 261/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 261
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Key identifying material R Enter material number
IndustrySector
Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material
MaterialType
Group to which material isassigned.
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored for
this material
Copy From
Material:
Similar material from which th
systemobtains selected values
O Leave blank.
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
Press Enter.
On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check at least one box other than the
basic data views.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 262/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 262
Enter.
On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter the plant number and other
information in the fields as specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 263/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 263
Note that the fields displayed depends upon the screensselected.
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Organizati
onal Levels
Section Header
Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will
be active or select from pulldown menu
StorageLocation
Storage LocationIdentification key
O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or select
from pull down menu
Profiles Section Header
MRPProfile
MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that are
independent of the
Forecast prof.
Forecast profile O Key that allows you to storeforecast parametersindependently of a materialmaster record.
Enter.
Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
th is document on above pages)
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 264/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 264
8. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZIT
Overview
A material master is required for a material.
A material needs to have additional department views created.
A new material is to be used in a production process.
A material needs to be extended to another plant.
Requirement for Valuation of material in the Material Master.
A need to define a Production Resource / Tool as a Material.
Business Process Description Overview
Material masters are created when a material required is not defined in the material master. Control ofmaster data depends largely on how each company sets up its Organizational levels - centralized ordecentralized. Some material data is valid for all organizational levels while other data is valid only at
certain levels. (i.e.: client, plant, sales org., etc.). All functional areas of the system use the same materialmaster data. The material master data is defined in individual screens (departmental views) that can be
added as needed. Thus a material can be created with only basic data and other departments can addother information later as it becomes available.
The views possible for material are controlled by the material type selected.
For a material to be used in the system it needs to be created for each plant. Multiple views of a materialare possible but at a minimum, the material needs to have a description and a base unit of measureassigned on the basic data view. Additional department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, MRP)can be added at a later time by extending the material. As additional plants are added, a material willneed to be extended to the plants before it can be used there.
A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions areto be carried out for that PRT.
The information required to be input is dependent upon which department views are being created.
Thus, material master information is typically entered at different times by numerous system users. Note that to add a view, the “Create Material” transaction is used rather than the “Change Material”transaction.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 265/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 265
Input - Required Fields Field Value / Comments
Material Not required as system will assign a new number
Industry Sector Enter T for Telecom Industry
Material Type Press F4 for list of choices. Select “ZIT” for Material Type – ITMaterials
Base Unit of Measure Enter the inventory unit of measure (Example EA,PC, LB, GA)
Other information Depending upon the views to be created, additional informationwill be required
Output - Results Comments New material created Material Created and available for other activities
New view added to a material View AddedMaterial extended to a new plant Material extended
BPP Table of Contents
Since a material can have from 1 to more than 30 views depending upon the material type and views
desired, a user should select the relevant sections of this document and ignore the views that are notdesired. The procedural steps included in this document are as follows:\
Basic Data
Purchasing
Purchase Order Text
MRP
Forecasting
Plant data/storage
Quality mgt.
Accounting
Costing
Plant stock
Storage location stock
Extending a material to add a departmental view Extending a material to another plant
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 266/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 266
Tips and Tricks
If no other view exists, you must enter the base (standard / inventory) Unit of measure and a
material description.
Using a reference material (similar characteristics etc.) saves a lot of effort as all the views will be
copied over and can be changed or overwritten.
Note: When creating the MRP Views (or any view for that matter), the Industry Sector and Material
type will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least one view exists.
The material data can be entered with or without an MRP profile. An MRP profile contains typical
MRP data for a particular procedure. The values can be fixed (cannot be changed) of default values
(can be overridden). The MRP profile simplifies data entry in the master record. For example if an
MRP controller looks after similar material at several plants, a profile will be defined in the system
and assigned to new materials as they are created.
To set user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:
Views:
Menus: Defaults >> Views
Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a new
material.
Select ‘View selection only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to be by-
passed unless selected.
Organizational levels:
Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a new
material.
Select ‘Org. levels/profiles only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to
be by-passed unless selected.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 267/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 267
To extend a material to a different plant requires selecting the new plant on the organizational levelscreen. Note that all views of a material are not extended unless they were selected on the initialscreen. In addition, each plant may have a different system configuration requiring additional inputson each of the departmental screens. Material changes made in one plant do not change that materialin other plants.
To determine which views of a material need to be added or to see which plants a material has beenextended to, use transaction MM50 (Logistics>Material Management>Material
Master>Other>Extend Material View(s)).
Procedure Steps
Access transaction by:
Via Menus
(a) Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediate
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)(d) Logistics> Logistics Execution> Master Data > Material >
Material > Create>Immediately(e) Logistics>Central function >Engineering> Material
>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(f) Accounting>Project Systems > Basic Data > Master Data>Material>Create
(g) Logistics>Environmental Health & Safety> DangerousGoods Management> Environment> Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(h) Logistics>Customer Service > Technical Objects> Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(i) Logistics>Plant Maintenance> TechnicalObjects>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(j) Logistics>Sales & Distribution> Master data >Products >Bill
of Materials> Environment> Material Master >Material >Create (General)
(k) Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
Via Transaction Code MM01
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 268/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 268
On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Key identifying material N/A Leave Blank System will provide number
IndustrySector
Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned
R Type T(Telecom Industry) orselect from pull down menu
MaterialType
Group to which material isassigned.
R Type IT Material or select fromthe Pull Down Menu
.
Copy FromMaterial:
Similar material from which thsystem obtains selected values.
O Leave blank, unless newmaterial is based on an
existing material
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 269/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 269
On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes
Click on Basic Data 1, and any other views needed.
Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specif ic materi al types
wil l not contain certain views.
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 270/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 270
On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Organizati
onal Levels
Section Header
Plant Plant identification key O Enter Plant where material will
be active or select from pulldown menu
StorageLocation
Storage LocationIdentification key
O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or selectfrom pull down menu
Profiles Section Header
MRPProfile
MRP Parameters C Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that are
independent of the materialmaster record.
Forecast prof.
Forecast profile C Key that allows you to storeforecast parameters
independently of a materialmaster record.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 271/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 271
Enter.
On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 1 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 272/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 272
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Material Description R Enter in material description
Base Unitof Measure
Units of measure in whichstocks of the material are
managed
R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list
Material
Group
Key allowing grouping of
same or similar materials
R Enter Material Group
Old
Material
Number
Legacy system material numbe
previous SAP material master
O Enter if appropriate
X PlantMatl Status
Indicates whether the materialmay be used within different
departments
C Enter if appropriate As of now thisfield will not
be used.Howeverdepending onrequirement,this can be
used afterimplementation
Generic
Req. Number
Generic Requirement Number O Enter if Appropriate
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 273/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 273
On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 2 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 274/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 274
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Ind. StdDesc.
Description Of TheMaterial in accordancewith the appropriateindustry standard.
OPart Number to be maintained
Document Number of the drawing thatexists for this object.
O Drawing Number to bemaintained.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 275/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 275
On the tab “Purchasing” enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 276/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 276
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Base Unit
of Measure
Inventory UOM R Defaults in from Basic Data 1
screen.
Not to be
changed orused here
Order Unit UOM for ordering O Enter only if different from base UOM and required byVendor
If definedhere, orderingunit will becommon for
all POs andhencerecommended
to be used atPO level and
not in purchasingview
PurchasingGroup
Group Responsible for purchasMaterial
R Enter or select from pull down li
Material
Group
Group code of like materials R Defaults in from Basic Data 1 sc Not to be
changed orused here
Plantsp.matlstatus
Plant specific material status.Determines availability ofMaterial for purchase or
production
O Blank indicates available As of now thisfield will not
be used.
BatchManagement
Identifies the material asmanaged by batch
O Check if appropriate It will bemaintainedonly for those
materials forwhich shelf
life needs to be maintained.
Purchasin
g Values
Section Heading
Purchasing
Value Key
Identifies follow up intervals
and delivery tolerances
O Select appropriate key from
pull down listOther
Data
Section Heading
GRProcessing
time
Number of days required toinspect and place in storage
O Enter number of days ifrelevant
This will besame for
material type.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 277/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 277
However itcan be
different forindividual
material aswell.
Source List Mandates entry of supplier before PO issues
O Check box if appropriate It will bemaintained for
ProprietaryItems
Mfr. Partnumber
Manufacturer part number O Enter number if appropriate This field will be used tocapture
manufacturer's part no. for
proprietaryitems only
Mfr. Manufacturer identifier O Use pull down menu This field will be used incase of item is
proprietary.
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 278/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 278
On tab “Purchase order text” enter appropriate text in the desired languages
and press enter. OPTIONAL
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 279/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 279
On tab “MRP1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 280/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 280
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
Data
Section Heading
Base Unit ofMeasure
Inventory Unit of measure R Enter the inventory unit ofmeasure for this product
Defaults ifBasic Data 1view exists
MRP
Procedure Section Heading
MRP Type Identifies the type of MRP/MPS to be performed
R Mainly, no planning (ND) andmanual reorder point planning
(VB) will be used
After thegeneration of
sufficient datain the SAP,
later onautomaticreorder point
planning (VM)may be
considered.
Reorder point Reorder point O Enter value
MRPController
Code for the personresponsible for MRP/MPS
for this material
O Press F4 for list. Select desiredcode from the list
Lot Size
Data
Section Heading
Lot Size Identifies the type of LotSizing that will occur.
O "Replenish to maximum stock -HB" will be used.
Maximum
stock level
Maximum stock level
allowed
O Enter value
Roundingvalue
Rounding value for purchase order quantity.Value to a multiple of
which the system rounds upthe procurement quantity.
O Enter value
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 281/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 281
On tab “MRP2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 282/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 282
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Scheduling
Plnd DeliveryTime
Number of days required toobtain material obtainedexternally
O Enter number of days if needed
Enter
On tab “MRP3”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 283/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 283
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
AvailabilityCheck
Identifies whether totalrequirements by period areto be used or individualRequirements
R Enter 01 (period) or 02(individual).
NOTE: This is the onlyrequired field on this screen
Preferencedepends uponcompany
Tot. Repl.Lead Time
Total lead time for finished product, including
production and
procurement along thelongest path
O Enter time in days
Cross project Indicator for cross projectmaterial
O Use pull down menu
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 284/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 284
On tab “Forecasting”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
Not Applicable
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
data
Section header
Forecastmodel
Indicator that defines onwhich forecast model thesystem bases its calculation of
future requirements of thematerial.
R Use pull down to changedefault value
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 285/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 285
On tab “Plant data/stor. 1” enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 286/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 286
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
Data
Section Heading
Base Unit of
Measure
Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pull
down list
Defaults from
Basic Data
Unit of Issue Unit in which material is
issued
O Enter Unit of Issue or select
from pull down list
Storage bin Storage bin O Enter value is appropriate
Ph. Inv.Indicator for
cyclecounting
Indicates that the givenmaterial is subject to the
cycle counting method ofinventory. The indicator
also defines at which timeintervals a physicalinventory is to be carried
out for the material
O Select from pull down menu
Shelf Life
Data
Section Heading
Min. Rem.
Shelf Life
Number of days material
needs to be kept for thesystem to accept
O Enter number of days.
Total ShelfLife
Number of days materialwill keep in total
O Enter number of days
Period
Indicator forshell life
The period indicator
specifies the unit ofmeasurement for a periodof time
O Enter number of days
Old Material Number
Plant specific Old Material Number
O Enter Old Material Numbers
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 287/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 287
On tab “Plant data/stor.2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General plant parameters
Section header
Neg. stocksin plant Negative stocks allowed in plant O Check box as appropriate
Log.Handling
group
Logistics handling groupfor workload calculation
O Use pull down menu
Serial No. Serial number profile O Use pull down menu
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 288/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 288
profile
Dist. Prof Distribution profile ofmaterial in plant
O Use pull down menu
Profit center Profit center R Use pull down menu
Stock
determinationGroup
The stock determination
group combined with theStock Determination Rule
at plant level create a keyfor the stock determinationstrategy.
O Use pull down menu
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 289/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 289
n tab “Quality management”, enter information in the fields as specified in
the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 290/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 290
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General data Section header
Base Unit ofmeasure
Base unit of measure R defaults from Basic data View
Procurement
data
Section header
Inspection
type
The inspection type defines
how an inspection is performed. Several
inspection types can beassigned to an inspection lotorigin.
O
QM control
key
Control Key for Quality
Management in Procurement
O Use pull down menu
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 291/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 291
On tab “Accounting 1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 292/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 292
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
Data Section Heading
Base Unit ofMeasure
Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list
Defaults fromBasic Data.
ValuationCategory
Indicates whether stocksare valuated together or
separately
O Press F4 to call the menu list
Current
Valuation
Section Heading
Valuation
Class
Defines which group of
G/L accounts material isassigned
R Select from pull down menu to
change default value
Prom. stk val.Class Valuation Class for ProjectStock. Default value forthe valuation class forvaluated project stocks ofthe material.
R Use pull down menu
Price Control Defines whether material isvaluated with standard or
moving average price
R „V‟ – Moving Average Price Defaults infrom the
material type.
Mov. Avg.Price
Moving average price ofthe material
C Enter price
Enter.
On tab “Costing 1” and tab “Costing 2”, Only views will be maintained, no
field will be populated as of now.
Not Applicable
On tab “Plant stock ”, information is displayed regarding the stocks of this
material in this plant: Automatic
Not ApplicableEnter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 293/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 293
On tab “Stor. location stock”, information is displayed regarding the stocks
of this material in this storage location: Automatic
Not Applicable
Save to create the material using the “save” button or use the “Ctrl S” key combination.
To extend a material to add an additional department view:
Access transaction by:
Via Menus (a) Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)Via Transaction Code MM01
On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 294/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 294
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Key identifying material R Enter material number
IndustrySector
Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored for
this materialMaterialType
Group to which material isassigned.
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material
Copy FromMaterial:
Similar material from which thsystemobtains selected values
O Leave blank.
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 295/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 295
On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes for the
screen(s) to be added.
Enter.
On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed will depend upon the views selected.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 296/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 296
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Organizati
onal Levels
Section Header
Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will be active or select from pull
down menu
StorageLocation
Storage LocationIdentification key
O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or selectfrom pull down menu
Profiles Section Header
MRP
Profile
MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that areindependent of the
Forecast prof.
Forecast profile O Key that allows you to storeforecast parameters
independently of a materialmaster record.
Enter.
Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
this document on page 2).
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 297/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 297
To extend a material to another plant:
Access transaction by:
Via Menus (a) Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
Via Transaction Code MM01
On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 298/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 298
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Key identifying material R Enter material number
IndustrySector
Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material
MaterialType
Group to which material isassigned.
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored for
this material
Copy From
Material:
Similar material from which th
systemobtains selected values
O Leave blank.
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
Press Enter.
On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check at least one box other than the
basic data views.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 299/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 299
Enter.
On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter the plant number and other
information in the fields as specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 300/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 300
Note that the fields displayed depends upon the screens selected.
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Organizati
onal Levels
Section Header
Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will
be active or select from pull
down menu
StorageLocation
Storage LocationIdentification key
O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or selectfrom pull down menu
Profiles Section Header
MRPProfile
MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that are
independent of the
Forecast
prof.
Forecast profile O Key that allows you to store
forecast parametersindependently of a materialmaster record.
Enter.
Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
th is document on above pagee).
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 301/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 301
9. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZMKT
Overview
A material master is required for a material.
A material needs to have additional department views created.
A new material is to be used in a production process.
A material needs to be extended to another plant.
Requirement for Valuation of material in the Material Master.
A need to define a Production Resource / Tool as a Material.
Business Process Description Overview
Material masters are created when a material required is not defined in the material master. Control ofmaster data depends largely on how each company sets up its Organizational levels - centralized ordecentralized. Some material data is valid for all organizational levels while other data is valid only at
certain levels. (i.e.: client, plant, sales org., etc.). All functional areas of the system use the same materialmaster data. The material master data is defined in individual screens (departmental views) that can be
added as needed. Thus a material can be created with only basic data and other departments can addother information later as it becomes available.
The views possible for material are controlled by the material type selected.
For a material to be used in the system it needs to be created for each plant. Multiple views of a materialare possible but at a minimum, the material needs to have a description and a base unit of measureassigned on the basic data view. Additional department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, MRP)
can be added at a later time by extending the material. As additional plants are added, a material willneed to be extended to the plants before it can be used there.
A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions areto be carried out for that PRT.
The information required to be input is dependent upon which department views are being created.
Thus, material master information is typically entered at different times by numerous system users. Note that to add a view, the “Create Material” transaction is used rather than the “Change Material”
transaction.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 302/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 302
Input - Required Fields Field Value / Comments
Material Not required as system will assign a new number
Industry Sector Enter T for Telecom Industry
Material Type Press F4 for list of choices. Select “ZMKT” for Material Type – Marketing Materials
Base Unit of Measure Enter the inventory unit of measure (Example EA,PC, LB, GA)
Other information Depending upon the views to be created, additional informationwill be required
Output - Results Comments New material created Material Created and available for other activities
New view added to a material View AddedMaterial extended to a new plant Material extended
BPP Table of Contents
Since a material can have from 1 to more than 30 views depending upon the material type and views
desired, a user should select the relevant sections of this document and ignore the views that are notdesired. The procedural steps included in this document are as follows:
Basic Data
Purchasing
Purchase Order Text
MRP
Forecasting
Plant data/storage
Quality mgt.
Accounting
Costing
Plant stock
Storage location stock
Extending a material to add a departmental view
Extending a material to another plant
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 303/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 303
Tips and Tricks
If no other view exists, you must enter the base (standard / inventory) Unit of measure and a
material description.
Using a reference material (similar characteristics etc.) saves a lot of effort as all the views will be
copied over and can be changed or overwritten.
Note: When creating the MRP Views (or any view for that matter), the Industry Sector and Material
type will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least one view exists.
The material data can be entered with or without an MRP profile. An MRP profile contains typical
MRP data for a particular procedure. The values can be fixed (cannot be changed) of default values
(can be overridden). The MRP profile simplifies data entry in the master record. For example if an
MRP controller looks after similar material at several plants, a profile will be defined in the system
and assigned to new materials as they are created.
To set user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:
Views:
Menus: Defaults >> Views
Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a newmaterial.
Select ‘View selection only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to be by-
passed unless selected.
Organizational levels:
Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels
Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a new
material.
Select ‘Org. levels/profiles only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to
be by-passed unless selected.
To extend a material to a different plant requires selecting the new plant on the organizational level
screen. Note that all views of a material are not extended unless they were selected on the initial
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 304/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 304
screen. In addition, each plant may have a different system configuration requiring additional inputson each of the departmental screens. Material changes made in one plant do not change that material
in other plants.
To determine which views of a material need to be added or to see which plants a material has beenextended to, use transaction MM50 (Logistics>Material Management>MaterialMaster>Other>Extend Material View(s)).
Procedure Steps
Access transaction by:
Via Menus
(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material
master>Material>Create (General) > Immediate(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
(d) Logistics> Logistics Execution> Master Data > Material >Material > Create>Immediately
(e) Logistics>Central function >Engineering> Material>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(f) Accounting>Project Systems > Basic Data > Master Data
>Material>Create(g) Logistics>Environmental Health & Safety> Dangerous
Goods Management> Environment> Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(h) Logistics>Customer Service > Technical Objects> Material
>Create (General) > Immediately(i) Logistics>Plant Maintenance> Technical
Objects>Material>Create (General) > Immediately(j) Logistics>Sales & Distribution> Master data >Products >Bill
of Materials> Environment> Material Master >Material >Create (General)
(k) Logistics>Material Management>Material
master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
Via Transaction Code MM01
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 305/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 305
On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Key identifying material N/A Leave Blank System will provide number
IndustrySector
Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned
R Type T(Telecom Industry) orselect from pull down menu
MaterialType
Group to which material isassigned.
R Type Marketing Material orselect from the Pull DownMenu
.
Copy FromMaterial:
Similar material from which thsystem obtains selected values.
O Leave blank, unless newmaterial is based on anexisting material
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 306/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 306
On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes
Click on Basic Data 1, and any other views needed.
Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specif ic material types
wil l not contain certain views.
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 307/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 307
On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Organizati
onal Levels
Section Header
Plant Plant identification key O Enter Plant where material will
be active or select from pulldown menu
StorageLocation
Storage LocationIdentification key
O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or select
from pull down menu
Profiles Section Header
MRPProfile
MRP Parameters C Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that are
independent of the materialmaster record.
Forecast prof.
Forecast profile C Key that allows you to storeforecast parameters
independently of a materialmaster record.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 308/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 308
Enter.
On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 1 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 309/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 309
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Material Description R Enter in material description
Base Unitof Measure
Units of measure in whichstocks of the material are
managed
R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list
Material
Group
Key allowing grouping of
same or similar materials
R Enter Material Group
Old
Material
Number
Legacy system material numbe
previous SAP material master
O Enter if appropriate
X PlantMatl Status
Indicates whether the materialmay be used within different
departments
C Enter if appropriate As of now thisfield will not
be used.However
depending onrequirement,this can be
used afterimplementatio
n
Generic
Req. Number
Generic Requirement Number O Enter if Appropriate
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 310/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 310
On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 2 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 311/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 311
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Ind. StdDesc.
Description Of TheMaterial in accordancewith the appropriate
industry standard.
OPart Number to be maintained
Document Number of the drawing thatexists for this object.
O Drawing Number to bemaintained.
On the tab “Purchasing” enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 312/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 312
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 313/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 313
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Base Unitof Measure
Inventory UOM R Defaults in from Basic Data 1screen.
Not to bechanged orused here
Order Unit UOM for ordering O Enter only if different from
base UOM and required byVendor
If defined
here, orderingunit will becommon forall POs andhence
recommendedto be used atPO level and
not in purchasing
view
Purchasing
Group
Group Responsible for purchas
Material
R Enter or select from pull down li
Material
Group
Group code of like materials R Defaults in from Basic Data 1 sc Not to be
changed orused here
Plantsp.matl
status
Plant specific material status.Determines availability of
Material for purchase or production
O Blank indicates available As of now thisfield will not
be used.
BatchManageme
nt
Identifies the material asmanaged by batch O Check if appropriate It will bemaintained
only for thosematerials forwhich shelf
life needs to be maintained.
Purchasin
g Values
Section Heading
PurchasingValue Key
Identifies follow up intervalsand delivery tolerances
O Select appropriate key from pull down list
Other
Data
Section Heading
GRProcessing
time
Number of days required toinspect and place in storage
O Enter number of days ifrelevant
This will besame for
material type.However it
can be
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 314/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 314
different forindividual
material aswell.
Source List Mandates entry of supplier before PO issues
O Check box if appropriate It will bemaintained forProprietaryItems
Mfr. Partnumber
Manufacturer part number O Enter number if appropriate This field will be used to
capturemanufacturer's
part no. for
proprietaryitems only
Mfr. Manufacturer identifier O Use pull down menu This field will be used in
case of item is proprietary.
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 315/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 315
On tab “Purchase order text” enter appropriate text in the desired languages
and press enter. OPTIONAL
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 316/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 316
On tab “MRP1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 317/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 317
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
Data Section Heading
Base Unit ofMeasure
Inventory Unit of measure R Enter the inventory unit ofmeasure for this product
Defaults ifBasic Data 1
view exists
MRP
Procedure Section Heading
MRP Type Identifies the type of MRP/MPS to be performed
R Mainly, no planning (ND) andmanual reorder point planning(VB) will be used
After thegeneration ofsufficient datain the SAP,later on
automaticreorder point
planning (VM)may beconsidered.
Reorder point Reorder point O Enter value
MRPController
Code for the personresponsible for MRP/MPSfor this material
O Press F4 for list. Select desiredcode from the list
Lot Size
Data
Section Heading
Lot Size Identifies the type of LotSizing that will occur. O "Replenish to maximum stock -HB" will be used.
Maximum
stock level
Maximum stock level
allowed
O Enter value
Rounding
value
Rounding value for
purchase order quantity.Value to a multiple ofwhich the system rounds upthe procurement quantity.
O Enter value
Enter.
On tab “MRP2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 318/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 318
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 319/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 319
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Scheduling
Plnd Delivery
Time
Number of days required to
obtain material obtainedexternally
O Enter number of days if needed
Enter
On tab “MRP3”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 320/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 320
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 321/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 321
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
AvailabilityCheck
Identifies whether totalrequirements by period areto be used or individual
Requirements
R Enter 01 (period) or 02(individual).
NOTE: This is the only
required field on this screen
Preferencedepends uponcompany
Tot. Repl.Lead Time
Total lead time for finished product, including production and procurement along thelongest path
O Enter time in days
Cross project Indicator for cross projectmaterial
O Use pull down menu
Enter.
On tab “Forecasting”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
Not Applicable
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Generaldata
Section header
Forecastmodel
Indicator that defines onwhich forecast model the
system bases its calculation offuture requirements of thematerial.
R Use pull down to changedefault value
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 322/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 322
On tab “Plant data/stor. 1” enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 323/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 323
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
Data
Section Heading
Base Unit ofMeasure
Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list
Defaults fromBasic Data
Unit of Issue Unit in which material isissued
O Enter Unit of Issue or selectfrom pull down list
Storage bin Storage bin O Enter value is appropriate
Ph. Inv.Indicator forcycle
counting
Indicates that the givenmaterial is subject to thecycle counting method of
inventory. The indicatoralso defines at which time
intervals a physicalinventory is to be carriedout for the material
O Select from pull down menu
Shelf Life
Data Section Heading
Min. Rem.Shelf Life
Number of days materialneeds to be kept for thesystem to accept
O Enter number of days.
Total ShelfLife
Number of days materialwill keep in total
O Enter number of days
PeriodIndicator forshell life
The period indicatorspecifies the unit ofmeasurement for a period
of time
O Enter number of days
Old Material Number
Plant specific Old Material Number
O Enter Old Material Numbers
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 324/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 324
On tab “Plant data/stor.2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General plant
parameters
Section header
Neg. stocks
in plant
Negative stocks allowed in
plant
O Check box as appropriate
Log.
Handlinggroup
Logistics handling group
for workload calculation
O Use pull down menu
Serial No. profile
Serial number profile O Use pull down menu
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 325/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 325
Dist. Prof Distribution profile ofmaterial in plant
O Use pull down menu
Profit center Profit center R Use pull down menu
Stockdetermination
Group
The stock determinationgroup combined with the
Stock Determination Ruleat plant level create a keyfor the stock determinationstrategy.
O Use pull down menu
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 326/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 326
On tab “Quality management”, enter information in the fields as specified in
the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 327/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 327
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General data Section header
Base Unit ofmeasure
Base unit of measure R defaults from Basic data View
Procurement
data
Section header
Inspection
type
The inspection type defines
how an inspection is performed. Several
inspection types can beassigned to an inspection lotorigin.
O
QM control
key
Control Key for Quality
Management in Procurement
O Use pull down menu
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 328/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 328
On tab “Accounting 1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 329/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 329
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
Data Section Heading
Base Unit ofMeasure
Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list
Defaults fromBasic Data.
ValuationCategory
Indicates whether stocksare valuated together or
separately
O Press F4 to call the menu list
Current
Valuation
Section Heading
Valuation
Class
Defines which group of
G/L accounts material isassigned
R Select from pull down menu to
change default value
Prom. stk val.Class Valuation Class for ProjectStock. Default value forthe valuation class forvaluated project stocks ofthe material.
R Use pull down menu
Price Control Defines whether material isvaluated with standard or
moving average price
R „V‟ – Moving Average Price Defaults infrom the
material type.
Mov. Avg.Price
Moving average price ofthe material
C Enter price
Enter.
On tab “Costing 1” and tab “Costing 2”, Only views will be maintained, no
field will be populated as of now.
Not Applicable
On tab “Plant stock ”, information is displayed regarding the stocks of this
material in this plant: Automatic
Not Applicable
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 330/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 330
On tab “Stor. location stock”, information is displayed regarding the stocks
of this material in this storage location: Automatic
Not Applicable
Save to create the material using the “save” button or use the “Ctrl S” key combination.
To extend a material to add an additional department view:
Access transaction by:
Via Menus (a) Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)Via Transaction Code MM01
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 331/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 331
On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Key identifying material R Enter material number
IndustrySector
Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material
Material
Type
Group to which material is
assigned.
O Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored forthis material
Copy FromMaterial:
Similar material from which thsystem
obtains selected values
O Leave blank.
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 332/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 332
Press Enter.
On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes for the
screen(s) to be added.
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 333/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 333
On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed will depend upon the views selected.
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values CommentsOrganizati
onal Levels
Section Header
Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will be active or select from pulldown menu
StorageLocation
Storage LocationIdentification key
O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or select
from pull down menu
Profiles Section Header
MRPProfile
MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that are
independent of theForecast
prof.Forecast profile O Key that allows you to store
forecast parametersindependently of a materialmaster record.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 334/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 334
Enter.
Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
this document on page 2).
To extend a material to another plant:
Access transaction by:
Via Menus (a) Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>MaterialMaster>Material > Create(General)
Via Transaction Code MM01
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 335/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 335
On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Key identifying material R Enter material number
IndustrySector
Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored for
this material
Material
Type
Group to which material is
assigned.
O Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored forthis material
Copy FromMaterial:
Similar material from which thsystemobtains selected values
O Leave blank.
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 336/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 336
On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check at least one box other than the
basic data views.
Enter.
On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter the plant number and other
information in the fields as specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed depends upon the screens selected.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 337/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 337
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Organizati
onal Levels
Section Header
Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will
be active or select from pulldown menu
StorageLocation
Storage LocationIdentification key
O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or select
from pull down menuProfiles Section Header
MRPProfile
MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that are
independent of the
Forecast
prof.
Forecast profile O Key that allows you to store
forecast parametersindependently of a material
master record.
Enter.
Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
th is document on above pages).
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 338/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 338
10. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZNVL
Overview
A material master is required for a material.
A material needs to have additional department views created.
A new material is to be used in a production process.
A material needs to be extended to another plant.
Requirement for Valuation of material in the Material Master.
A need to define a Production Resource / Tool as a Material.
Business Process Description Overview
Material masters are created when a material required is not defined in the material master. Control ofmaster data depends largely on how each company sets up its Organizational levels - centralized ordecentralized. Some material data is valid for all organizational levels while other data is valid only at
certain levels. (i.e.: client, plant, sales org., etc.). All functional areas of the system use the same materialmaster data. The material master data is defined in individual screens (departmental views) that can be
added as needed. Thus a material can be created with only basic data and other departments can addother information later as it becomes available.
The views possible for material are controlled by the material type selected.
For a material to be used in the system it needs to be created for each plant. Multiple views of a materialare possible but at a minimum, the material needs to have a description and a base unit of measureassigned on the basic data view. Additional department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, MRP)
can be added at a later time by extending the material. As additional plants are added, a material willneed to be extended to the plants before it can be used there.
A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions areto be carried out for that PRT.
The information required to be input is dependent upon which department views are being created.
Thus, material master information is typically entered at different times by numerous system users. Note that to add a view, the “Create Material” transaction is used rather than the “Change Material”
transaction.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 339/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 339
Input - Required Fields Field Value / Comments
Material Not required as system will assign a new number
Industry Sector Enter T for Telecom Industry
Material Type Press F4 for list of choices. Select “ZNVL” for Material Type – Non Valuated
Base Unit of Measure Enter the inventory unit of measure (Example EA,PC, LB, GA)
Other information Depending upon the views to be created, additional informationwill be required
Output - Results Comments New material created Material Created and available for other activities
New view added to a material View AddedMaterial extended to a new plant Material extended
BPP Table of Contents
Since a material can have from 1 to more than 30 views depending upon the material type and views
desired, a user should select the relevant sections of this document and ignore the views that are notdesired. The procedural steps included in this document are as follows:
Basic Data
Purchasing
Purchase Order Text
MRP
Forecasting
Plant data/storage
Quality mgt.
Accounting
Costing
Plant stock
Storage location stock
Extending a material to add a departmental view
Extending a material to another plant
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 340/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 340
Tips and Tricks
If no other view exists, you must enter the base (standard / inventory) Unit of measure and a
material description.
Using a reference material (similar characteristics etc.) saves a lot of effort as all the views will be
copied over and can be changed or overwritten.
Note: When creating the MRP Views (or any view for that matter), the Industry Sector and Material
type will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least one view exists.
The material data can be entered with or without an MRP profile. An MRP profile contains typical
MRP data for a particular procedure. The values can be fixed (cannot be changed) of default values
(can be overridden). The MRP profile simplifies data entry in the master record. For example if an
MRP controller looks after similar material at several plants, a profile will be defined in the system
and assigned to new materials as they are created.
To set user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:
Views:
Menus: Defaults >> Views
Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a newmaterial.
Select ‘View selection only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to be by-
passed unless selected.
Organizational levels:
Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels
Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a new
material.
Select ‘Org. levels/profiles only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to
be by-passed unless selected.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 341/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 341
To extend a material to a different plant requires selecting the new plant on the organizational levelscreen. Note that all views of a material are not extended unless they were selected on the initial
screen. In addition, each plant may have a different system configuration requiring additional inputson each of the departmental screens. Material changes made in one plant do not change that material
in other plants.
To determine which views of a material need to be added or to see which plants a material has beenextended to, use transaction MM50 (Logistics>Material Management>Material
Master>Other>Extend Material View(s)).
Procedure Steps
Access transaction by:
Via Menus
(a) Logistics>Material Management>Material
master>Material>Create (General) > Immediate(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>MaterialMaster>Material > Create(General)
(d) Logistics> Logistics Execution> Master Data > Material >Material > Create>Immediately
(e) Logistics>Central function >Engineering> Material
>Material>Create (General) > Immediately(f) Accounting>Project Systems > Basic Data > Master Data
>Material>Create(g) Logistics>Environmental Health & Safety> Dangerous
Goods Management> Environment> Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(h) Logistics>Customer Service > Technical Objects> Material
>Create (General) > Immediately(i) Logistics>Plant Maintenance> Technical
Objects>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(j) Logistics>Sales & Distribution> Master data >Products >Billof Materials> Environment> Material Master >Material >
Create (General)(k) Logistics>Material Management>Material
master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
Via Transaction Code MM01
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 342/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 342
On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Key identifying material N/A Leave Blank System will provide number
IndustrySector
Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned
R Type T(Telecom Industry) orselect from pull down menu
Material
Type
Group to which material is
assigned.
R Type Non Valuated Material or
select from the Pull DownMenu
.
Copy FromMaterial:
Similar material from which thsystem obtains selected values.
O Leave blank, unless newmaterial is based on anexisting material
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 343/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 343
Press Enter.
On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes
Click on Basic Data 1, and any other views needed.
Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specif ic materi al types
wil l not contain certain views.
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 344/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 344
On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Organizati
onal Levels
Section Header
Plant Plant identification key O Enter Plant where material will
be active or select from pulldown menu
StorageLocation
Storage LocationIdentification key
O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or select
from pull down menu
Profiles Section Header
MRPProfile
MRP Parameters C Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that are
independent of the materialmaster record.
Forecast prof.
Forecast profile C Key that allows you to storeforecast parameters
independently of a materialmaster record.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 345/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 345
Enter.
On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 1 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 346/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 346
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Material Description R Enter in material description
Base Unitof Measure
Units of measure in whichstocks of the material are
managed
R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list
Material
Group
Key allowing grouping of
same or similar materials
R Enter Material Group
Old
Material
Number
Legacy system material numbe
previous SAP material master
O Enter if appropriate
X PlantMatl Status
Indicates whether the materialmay be used within different
departments
C Enter if appropriate As of now thisfield will not
be used.However
depending onrequirement,this can be
used afterimplementatio
n
Generic
Req. Number
Generic Requirement Number O Enter if Appropriate
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 347/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 347
On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 2 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 348/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 348
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Ind. StdDesc.
Description Of TheMaterial in accordancewith the appropriate
industry standard.
OPart Number to be maintained
Document Number of the drawing thatexists for this object.
O Drawing Number to bemaintained.
On the tab “Purchasing” enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 349/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 349
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 350/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 350
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Base Unitof Measure
Inventory UOM R Defaults in from Basic Data 1screen.
Not to bechanged orused here
Order Unit UOM for ordering O Enter only if different from
base UOM and required byVendor
If defined
here, orderingunit will becommon forall POs andhence
recommendedto be used atPO level and
not in purchasing
view
Purchasing
Group
Group Responsible for purchas
Material
R Enter or select from pull down li
Material
Group
Group code of like materials R Defaults in from Basic Data 1 sc Not to be
changed orused here
Plantsp.matl
status
Plant specific material status.Determines availability of
Material for purchase or production
O Blank indicates available As of now thisfield will not
be used.
BatchManageme
nt
Identifies the material asmanaged by batch O Check if appropriate It will bemaintained
only for thosematerials forwhich shelf
life needs to be maintained.
Purchasin
g Values
Section Heading
PurchasingValue Key
Identifies follow up intervalsand delivery tolerances
O Select appropriate key from pull down list
Other
Data
Section Heading
GRProcessing
time
Number of days required toinspect and place in storage
O Enter number of days ifrelevant
This will besame for
material type.However it
can be
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 351/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 351
different forindividual
material aswell.
Source List Mandates entry of supplier before PO issues
O Check box if appropriate It will bemaintained forProprietaryItems
Mfr. Partnumber
Manufacturer part number O Enter number if appropriate This field will be used to
capturemanufacturer's
part no. for
proprietaryitems only
Mfr. Manufacturer identifier O Use pull down menu This field will be used in
case of item is proprietary.
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 352/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 352
On tab “Purchase order text” enter appropriate text in the desired languages
and press enter. OPTIONAL
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 353/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 353
On tab “MRP1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 354/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 354
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
Data
Section Heading
Base Unit ofMeasure
Inventory Unit of measure R Enter the inventory unit ofmeasure for this product
Defaults ifBasic Data 1view exists
MRP
Procedure
Section Heading
MRP Type Identifies the type of MRP
/MPS to be performed
R Mainly, no planning (ND) and
manual reorder point planning(VB) will be used
After the
generation ofsufficient data
in the SAP,later onautomatic
reorder point planning (VM)
may beconsidered.
Reorder point Reorder point O Enter value
MRP
Controller
Code for the person
responsible for MRP/MPSfor this material
O Press F4 for list. Select desired
code from the list
Lot Size
Data Section Heading
Lot Size Identifies the type of LotSizing that will occur.
O "Replenish to maximum stock -HB" will be used.
Maximumstock level
Maximum stock levelallowed
O Enter value
Roundingvalue
Rounding value for purchase order quantity.
Value to a multiple ofwhich the system rounds up
the procurement quantity.
O Enter value
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 355/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 355
On tab “MRP2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 356/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 356
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Scheduling
Plnd DeliveryTime
Number of days required toobtain material obtainedexternally
O Enter number of days if needed
Enter
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 357/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 357
On tab “MRP3”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 358/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 358
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
AvailabilityCheck
Identifies whether totalrequirements by period areto be used or individualRequirements
R Enter 01 (period) or 02(individual).
NOTE: This is the onlyrequired field on this screen
Preferencedepends uponcompany
Tot. Repl.Lead Time
Total lead time for finished product, including
production and procurement along thelongest path
O Enter time in days
Cross project Indicator for cross projectmaterial
O Use pull down menu
Enter.
On tab “Forecasting”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
Not Applicable
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
data
Section header
Forecastmodel
Indicator that defines onwhich forecast model thesystem bases its calculation offuture requirements of the
material.
R Use pull down to changedefault value
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 359/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 359
On tab “Plant data/stor. 1” enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 360/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 360
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
Data
Section Heading
Base Unit of
Measure
Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pull
down list
Defaults from
Basic Data
Unit of Issue Unit in which material is
issued
O Enter Unit of Issue or select
from pull down list
Storage bin Storage bin O Enter value is appropriate
Ph. Inv.Indicator for
cyclecounting
Indicates that the givenmaterial is subject to the
cycle counting method ofinventory. The indicator
also defines at which timeintervals a physicalinventory is to be carried
out for the material
O Select from pull down menu
Shelf Life
Data
Section Heading
Min. Rem.
Shelf Life
Number of days material
needs to be kept for thesystem to accept
O Enter number of days.
Total ShelfLife
Number of days materialwill keep in total
O Enter number of days
Period
Indicator forshell life
The period indicator
specifies the unit ofmeasurement for a periodof time
O Enter number of days
Old Material Number
Plant specific Old Material Number
O Enter Old Material Numbers
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 361/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 361
On tab “Plant data/stor.2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 362/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 362
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General plant parameters
Section header
Neg. stocksin plant
Negative stocks allowed in plant
O Check box as appropriate
Log.Handling
group
Logistics handling groupfor workload calculation
O Use pull down menu
Serial No.
profile
Serial number profile O Use pull down menu
Dist. Prof Distribution profile of
material in plant
O Use pull down menu
Profit center Profit center R Use pull down menu
Stockdetermination
Group
The stock determinationgroup combined with the
Stock Determination Ruleat plant level create a key
for the stock determinationstrategy.
O Use pull down menu
Enter.
On tab “Quality management”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 363/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 363
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General data Section header
Base Unit of
measure
Base unit of measure R defaults from Basic data View
Procurement
data
Section header
Inspectiontype
The inspection type defineshow an inspection is
performed. Several
O
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 364/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 364
inspection types can beassigned to an inspection lot
origin.
QM control
key
Control Key for Quality
Management in Procurement
O Use pull down menu
Enter.
On tab “Accounting 1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
Not Applicable
On tab “Costing 1” and tab “Costing 2”, Only views will be maintained, no
field will be populated as of now.
Not Applicable
On tab “Plant stock ”, information is displayed regarding the stocks of this
material in this plant: Automatic
Not Applicable
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 365/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 365
On tab “Stor. location stock”, information is displayed regarding the stocks
of this material in this storage location: Automatic
Not Applicable
Save to create the material using the “save” button or use the “Ctrl S” key combination.
To extend a material to add an additional department view:
Access transaction by:
Via Menus (a) Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)Via Transaction Code MM01
On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 366/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 366
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Key identifying material R Enter material number
IndustrySector
Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material
MaterialType
Group to which material isassigned.
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material
Copy FromMaterial:
Similar material from which thsystem
obtains selected values
O Leave blank.
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 367/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 367
On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes for the
screen(s) to be added.
Enter.
On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 368/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 368
Note that the fields displayed will depend upon the views selected.
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Organizati
onal Levels
Section Header
Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will
be active or select from pulldown menu
StorageLocation Storage LocationIdentification key O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or selectfrom pull down menu
Profiles Section Header
MRPProfile
MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that are
independent of the
Forecast prof.
Forecast profile O Key that allows you to storeforecast parametersindependently of a material
master record.
Enter.
Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
this document on page 2).
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 369/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 369
To extend a material to another plant:
Access transaction by:
Via Menus (a) Logistics>Material Management>Material
master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)Via Transaction Code MM01
On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 370/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 370
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Key identifying material R Enter material number
IndustrySector
Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material
MaterialType
Group to which material isassigned.
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored for
this material
Copy From
Material:
Similar material from which th
systemobtains selected values
O Leave blank.
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
Press Enter.
On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check at least one box other than the
basic data views.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 371/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 371
Enter.
On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter the plant number and other
information in the fields as specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed depends upon the screens selected.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 372/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 372
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Organizati
onal Levels
Section Header
Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will be active or select from pull
down menu
Storage
Location
Storage Location
Identification key
O Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menuProfiles Section Header
MRP
Profile
MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that areindependent of the
Forecast prof.
Forecast profile O Key that allows you to storeforecast parametersindependently of a materialmaster record.
Enter.
Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
th is document on above pages).
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 373/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 373
11. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZRM
Overview
A material master is required for a material.
A material needs to have additional department views created.
A new material is to be used in a production process.
A material needs to be extended to another plant.
Requirement for Valuation of material in the Material Master.
A need to define a Production Resource / Tool as a Material.
Business Process Description Overview
Material masters are created when a material required is not defined in the material master. Control ofmaster data depends largely on how each company sets up its Organizational levels - centralized ordecentralized. Some material data is valid for all organizational levels while other data is valid only at
certain levels. (i.e.: client, plant, sales org., etc.). All functional areas of the system use the same materialmaster data. The material master data is defined in individual screens (departmental views) that can be
added as needed. Thus a material can be created with only basic data and other departments can addother information later as it becomes available.
The views possible for material are controlled by the material type selected.
For a material to be used in the system it needs to be created for each plant. Multiple views of a materialare possible but at a minimum, the material needs to have a description and a base unit of measureassigned on the basic data view. Additional department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, MRP)
can be added at a later time by extending the material. As additional plants are added, a material willneed to be extended to the plants before it can be used there.
A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions areto be carried out for that PRT.
The information required to be input is dependent upon which department views are being created.
Thus, material master information is typically entered at different times by numerous system users. Note that to add a view, the “Create Material” transaction is used rather than the “Change Material”
transaction.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 374/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 374
Input - Required Fields Field Value / Comments
MaterialRequired as using external numbers.
Industry Sector Enter T Telecom Industry
Material Type Press F4 to call the list of choices. Select “ZRM” for MaterialType – Raw Material
Base Unit of Measure Enter the inventory unit of measure (Example PC, EA)
Other information Depending upon the views to be created, additional informationwill be required
Output - Results Comments New material created Material Created and available for other activities
New view added to a material View AddedMaterial extended to a new plant Material extended
BPP Table of Contents
Since a material can have from 1 to more than 30 views depending upon the material type and views
desired, a user should select the relevant sections of this document and ignore the views that are notdesired. The procedural steps included in this document are as follows:
Basic Data
Purchasing
Purchase Order Text
MRP
Forecasting
Plant data/storage
Quality mgt.
Accounting
Costing
Plant stock
Storage location stock
Extending a material to add a departmental view
Extending a material to another plant
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 375/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 375
Tips and Tricks
If no other view exists, you must enter the base (standard / inventory) Unit of measure and a
material description.
Using a reference material (similar characteristics etc.) saves a lot of effort as all the views will be
copied over and can be changed or overwritten.
Note: When creating the MRP Views (or any view for that matter), the Industry Sector and Material
type will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least one view exists.
The material data can be entered with or without an MRP profile. An MRP profile contains typical
MRP data for a particular procedure. The values can be fixed (cannot be changed) of default values
(can be overridden). The MRP profile simplifies data entry in the master record. For example if an
MRP controller looks after similar material at several plants, a profile will be defined in the system
and assigned to new materials as they are created.
To set user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:
Views:
Menus: Defaults >> Views
Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a newmaterial.
Select ‘View selection only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to be by-
passed unless selected.
Organizational levels:
Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels
Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a new
material.
Select ‘Org. levels/profiles only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to
be by-passed unless selected.
To extend a material to a different plant requires selecting the new plant on the organizational level
screen. Note that all views of a material are not extended unless they were selected on the initial
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 376/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 376
screen. In addition, each plant may have a different system configuration requiring additional inputson each of the departmental screens. Material changes made in one plant do not change that material
in other plants.
To determine which views of a material need to be added or to see which plants a material has beenextended to, use transaction MM50 (Logistics>Material Management>MaterialMaster>Other>Extend Material View(s)).
Procedure Steps
Access transaction by:
Via Menus
(a) Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediate
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)(d) Logistics> Logistics Execution> Master Data > Material >
Material > Create>Immediately(e) Logistics>Central function >Engineering> Material
>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(f) Accounting>Project Systems > Basic Data > Master Data>Material>Create
(g) Logistics>Environmental Health & Safety> DangerousGoods Management> Environment> Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(h) Logistics>Customer Service > Technical Objects> Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(i) Logistics>Plant Maintenance> TechnicalObjects>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(j) Logistics>Sales & Distribution> Master data >Products >Billof Materials> Environment> Material Master >Material >Create (General)
(k) Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
Via Transaction Code MM01
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 377/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 377
On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Key identifying material N/A Leave Blank, as this is internalno assignment. System will
assign a new no for thematerial
IndustrySector
Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned
R Type T (Telecom Industry) orselect from pull down menu
MaterialType
Group to which material isassigned.
R Type ZADM or select from thePull Down Menu
.
Copy FromMaterial:
Similar material from which thsystem obtains selected values.
O Leave blank, unless newmaterial is based on an
existing material
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 378/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 378
On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes
Click on Basic Data 1, and any other views needed.
Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specif ic materi al types
wil l not contain certain views.
Press Enter.
On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 379/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 379
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Organizati
onal Levels
Section Header
Plant Plant identification key O Enter Plant where material will be active or select from pull
down menu
Storage
Location
Storage Location
Identification key
O Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menuProfiles Section Header
MRPProfile
MRP Parameters C Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that areindependent of the material
master record.
Forecast
prof.
Forecast profile C Key that allows you to store
forecast parametersindependently of a material
master record.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 380/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 380
Enter.
On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 1 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 381/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 381
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Material Description R Enter in material description
Base Unit
of Measure
Units of measure in which
stocks of the material aremanaged
R Enter UOM or select from pull
down list
MaterialGroup
Key allowing grouping ofsame or similar materials
R Enter Material Group
OldMaterial
Number
Legacy system material number previous SAP material master n
O Enter if appropriate
X PlantMatl Status
Indicates whether the materialmay be used within differentdepartments
C Enter if appropriate As of now thisfield will not
be used.
Howeverdepending on
requirement,this can beused after
implementation
GenericReq.
Number
Generic Requirement Number O Enter if Appropriate
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 382/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 382
On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 2 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 383/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 383
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Ind. StdDesc.
Description Of TheMaterial in accordancewith the appropriate
industry standard.
OPart Number to be maintained
Document Number of the drawing thatexists for this object.
O Drawing Number to bemaintained.
On the tab “Purchasing” enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 384/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 384
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Base Unitof Measure
Inventory UOM R Defaults in from Basic Data 1screen.
Not to bechanged or
used here
Order Unit UOM for ordering O Enter only if different from
base UOM and required byVendor
If defined
here, orderingunit will be
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 385/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 385
common forall POs and
hencerecommended
to be used atPO level andnot in
purchasingview
PurchasingGroup
Group Responsible for purchasMaterial
R Enter or select from pull down li
MaterialGroup
Group code of like materials R Defaults in from Basic Data 1 sc Not to bechanged or
used here
Plant
sp.matlstatus
Plant specific material status.
Determines availability ofMaterial for purchase or
production
O Blank indicates available As of now this
field will not be used.
Batch
Management
Identifies the material as
managed by batch
O Check if appropriate It will be
maintainedonly for those
materials forwhich shelflife needs to
be maintained.
Purchasin
g Values
Section Heading
PurchasingValue Key
Identifies follow up intervalsand delivery tolerances
O Select appropriate key from pull down list
Other
Data
Section Heading
GRProcessingtime
Number of days required toinspect and place in storage
O Enter number of days ifrelevant
This will besame formaterial type.However itcan be
different for
individualmaterial as
well.
Source List Mandates entry of supplier before PO issues
O Check box if appropriate It will bemaintained forProprietary
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 386/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 386
Items
Mfr. Partnumber
Manufacturer part number O Enter number if appropriate This field will be used tocapture
manufacturer's part no. for proprietaryitems only
Mfr. Manufacturer identifier O Use pull down menu This field will be used in
case of item is proprietary.
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 387/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 387
On tab “Purchase order text” enter appropriate text in the desired languages
and press enter. OPTIONAL
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 388/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 388
On tab “MRP1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 389/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 389
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
Data
Section Heading
Base Unit ofMeasure
Inventory Unit of measure R Enter the inventory unit ofmeasure for this product
Defaults ifBasic Data 1view exists
MRP
Procedure Section Heading
MRP Type Identifies the type of MRP/MPS to be performed
R Mainly, no planning (ND) andmanual reorder point planning
(VB) will be used
After thegeneration of
sufficient datain the SAP,
later onautomaticreorder point
planning (VM)may be
considered.
Reorder point Reorder point O Enter value
MRPController
Code for the personresponsible for MRP/MPS
for this material
O Press F4 for list. Select desiredcode from the list
Lot Size
Data
Section Heading
Lot Size Identifies the type of LotSizing that will occur.
O "Replenish to maximum stock -HB" will be used.
Maximum
stock level
Maximum stock level
allowed
O Enter value
Roundingvalue
Rounding value for purchase order quantity.Value to a multiple of
which the system rounds upthe procurement quantity.
O Enter value
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 390/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 390
On tab “MRP2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 391/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 391
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Scheduling
Plnd DeliveryTime
Number of days required toobtain material obtainedexternally
O Enter number of days if needed
Enter
On tab “MRP3”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 392/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 392
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 393/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 393
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
AvailabilityCheck
Identifies whether totalrequirements by period areto be used or individual
Requirements
R Enter 01 (period) or 02(individual).
NOTE: This is the only
required field on this screen
Preferencedepends uponcompany
Tot. Repl.Lead Time
Total lead time for finished product, including production and procurement along thelongest path
O Enter time in days
Cross project Indicator for cross projectmaterial
O Use pull down menu
Enter.
On tab “Forecasting”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
Not Applicable
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values CommentsGeneral
data
Section header
Forecast
model
Indicator that defines on
which forecast model thesystem bases its calculation offuture requirements of thematerial.
R Use pull down to change
default value
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 394/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 394
On tab “Plant data/stor. 1” enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 395/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 395
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
Data
Section Heading
Base Unit ofMeasure
Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list
Defaults fromBasic Data
Unit of Issue Unit in which material isissued
O Enter Unit of Issue or selectfrom pull down list
Storage bin Storage bin O Enter value is appropriate
Ph. Inv.Indicator forcycle
counting
Indicates that the givenmaterial is subject to thecycle counting method of
inventory. The indicatoralso defines at which time
intervals a physicalinventory is to be carriedout for the material
O Select from pull down menu
Shelf Life
Data Section Heading
Min. Rem.Shelf Life
Number of days materialneeds to be kept for thesystem to accept
O Enter number of days.
Total ShelfLife
Number of days materialwill keep in total
O Enter number of days
PeriodIndicator forshell life
The period indicatorspecifies the unit ofmeasurement for a period
of time
O Enter number of days
Old Material Number
Plant Specific Old materialnumber
O Enter Old Material Number
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 396/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 396
On tab “Plant data/stor.2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values CommentsGeneral plant parameters
Section header
Neg. stocksin plant
Negative stocks allowed in plant
O Check box as appropriate
Log. Logistics handling group O Use pull down menu
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 397/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 397
Handlinggroup
for workload calculation
Serial No. profile
Serial number profile O Use pull down menu
Dist. Prof Distribution profile of
material in plant
O Use pull down menu
Profit center Profit center R Use pull down menu
Stockdetermin.
Group
The stock determinationgroup combined with the
Stock Determination Ruleat plant level create a keyfor the stock determinationstrategy.
O Use pull down menu
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 398/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 398
Tab “Quality management”, enter information in the fields as specified in
the below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General data Section header
Base Unit ofmeasure
Base unit of measure R defaults from Basic data View
Procurement Section header
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 399/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 399
data
Inspectiontype
The inspection type defineshow an inspection is
performed. Several
inspection types can beassigned to an inspection lotorigin.
O
QM controlkey
Control Key for QualityManagement in Procurement
O Use pull down menu
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 400/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 400
On tab “Accounting 1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 401/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 401
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
Data Section Heading
Base Unit ofMeasure
Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list
Defaults fromBasic Data.
ValuationCategory
Indicates whether stocksare valuated together or
separately
O
Current
Valuation
Section Heading
Valuation
Class
Defines which group of
G/L accounts material isassigned
R Select from pull down menu to
change default value
Prom. stk val.Class Valuation Class for ProjectStock. Default value forthe valuation class forvaluated project stocks ofthe material.
R Use pull down menu
Price Control Defines whether material isvaluated with standard or
moving average price
R „V‟ – Moving Average Price Defaults infrom the
material type.
Mov. Avg.Price
Moving average price ofthe material
C Enter price
Enter.
On tab “Costing 1” and tab “Costing 2”, Only views will be maintained, no
field will be populated as of now.
Not Applicable
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 402/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 402
On tab “Plant stock ”, information is displayed regarding the stocks of this
material in this plant: AutomaticNot Applicable
On tab “Stor. location stock”, information is displayed regarding the stocks
of this material in this storage location: Automatic
Not Applicable
Save to create the material using the “save” button or use the “Ctrl S” key combination.
To extend a material to add an additional department view:
Access transaction by:
Via Menus (a) Logistics>Material Management>Material
master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>MaterialMaster>Material > Create(General)
Via Transaction Code MM01
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 403/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 403
On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Key identifying material R Enter material numberIndustrySector
Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material
MaterialType
Group to which material isassigned.
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored for
this material
Copy From
Material:
Similar material from which th
systemobtains selected values
O Leave blank.
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 404/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 404
On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes for the
screen(s) to be added.
Enter.
On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 405/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 405
Note that the fields displayed will depend upon the views selected.
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Organizati
onal Levels
Section Header
Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will
be active or select from pull
down menu
StorageLocation
Storage LocationIdentification key
O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or selectfrom pull down menu
Profiles Section Header
MRPProfile
MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that areindependent of the
Forecast
prof.
Forecast profile O Key that allows you to store
forecast parametersindependently of a materialmaster record.
Enter.
Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
this document on page 2).
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 406/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 406
To extend a material to another plant:
Access transaction by:
Via Menus (a) Logistics>Material Management>Material
master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)Via Transaction Code MM01
On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 407/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 407
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Key identifying material R Enter material number
IndustrySector
Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material
MaterialType
Group to which material isassigned.
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored for
this material
Copy From
Material:
Similar material from which th
systemobtains selected values
O Leave blank.
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
Press Enter.
On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check at least one box other than the
basic data views.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 408/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 408
Enter.
On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter the plant number and other
information in the fields as specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed depends upon the screens selected.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 409/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 409
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Organizati
onal Levels
Section Header
Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will be active or select from pulldown menu
StorageLocation
Storage LocationIdentification key
O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or selectfrom pull down menu
Profiles Section HeaderMRP
Profile
MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that areindependent of the
Forecast prof.
Forecast profile O Key that allows you to storeforecast parameters
independently of a materialmaster record.
Enter.
Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
th is document on above pages).
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 410/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 410
12. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZSAC
Overview
A material master is required for a material.
A material needs to have additional department views created.
A new material is to be used in a production process.
A material needs to be extended to another plant.
Requirement for Valuation of material in the Material Master.
A need to define a Production Resource / Tool as a Material.
Business Process Description Overview
Material masters are created when a material required is not defined in the material master. Control ofmaster data depends largely on how each company sets up its Organizational levels - centralized ordecentralized. Some material data is valid for all organizational levels while other data is valid only at
certain levels. (i.e.: client, plant, sales org., etc.). All functional areas of the system use the same materialmaster data. The material master data is defined in individual screens (departmental views) that can be
added as needed. Thus a material can be created with only basic data and other departments can addother information later as it becomes available.
The views possible for material are controlled by the material type selected.
For a material to be used in the system it needs to be created for each plant. Multiple views of a materialare possible but at a minimum, the material needs to have a description and a base unit of measureassigned on the basic data view. Additional department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, andMRP) can be added at a later time by extending the material. As additional plants are added, a materialwill need to be extended to the plants before it can be used there.
A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions areto be carried out for that PRT.
The information required to be input is dependent upon which department views are being created.
Thus, material master information is typically entered at different times by numerous system users. Note that to add a view, the “Create Material” transaction is used rather than the “Change Material”transaction.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 411/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 411
Input - Required Fields Field Value / Comments
Material Not required as system will assign a new number
Industry Sector Enter T for Telecom Industry
Material Type Press F4 for list of choices. Select “ZSAC” for Material Type – Sub Assembly Materials
Base Unit of Measure Enter the inventory unit of measure (Example EA,PC, LB, GA)
Other information Depending upon the views to be created, additional informationwill be required
Output - Results Comments New material created Material Created and available for other activities
New view added to a material View AddedMaterial extended to a new plant Material extended
BPP Table of Contents
Since a material can have from 1 to more than 30 views depending upon the material type and views
desired, a user should select the relevant sections of this document and ignore the views that are notdesired. The procedural steps included in this document are as follows:
Basic Data
Purchasing
Purchase Order Text
MRP
Forecasting
Plant data/storage
Quality mgt.
Accounting
Costing
Plant stock
Storage location stock
Extending a material to add a departmental view
Extending a material to another plant
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 412/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 412
Tips and Tricks
If no other view exists, you must enter the base (standard / inventory) Unit of measure and a
material description.
Using a reference material (similar characteristics etc.) saves a lot of effort as all the views will be
copied over and can be changed or overwritten.
Note: When creating the MRP Views (or any view for that matter), the Industry Sector and Material
type will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least one view exists.
The material data can be entered with or without an MRP profile. An MRP profile contains typical
MRP data for a particular procedure. The values can be fixed (cannot be changed) of default values
(can be overridden). The MRP profile simplifies data entry in the master record. For example if an
MRP controller looks after similar material at several plants, a profile will be defined in the system
and assigned to new materials as they are created.
To set user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:
Views:
Menus: Defaults >> Views
Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a new
material.
Select ‘View selection only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to be by-
passed unless selected.
Organizational levels:
Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a new
material.
Select ‘Org. levels/profiles only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to
be by-passed unless selected.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 413/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 413
To extend a material to a different plant requires selecting the new plant on the organizational levelscreen. Note that all views of a material are not extended unless they were selected on the initialscreen. In addition, each plant may have a different system configuration requiring additional inputson each of the departmental screens. Material changes made in one plant do not change that materialin other plants.
To determine which views of a material need to be added or to see which plants a material has beenextended to, use transaction MM50 (Logistics>Material Management>Material
Master>Other>Extend Material View(s)).
Procedure Steps
Access transaction by:
Via Menus
(a) Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediate
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>MaterialMaster>Material > Create(General)
(d) Logistics> Logistics Execution> Master Data > Material >Material > Create>Immediately
(e) Logistics>Central function >Engineering> Material
>Material>Create (General) > Immediately(f) Accounting>Project Systems > Basic Data > Master Data
>Material>Create(g) Logistics>Environmental Health & Safety> Dangerous
Goods Management> Environment> Material
master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately(h) Logistics>Customer Service > Technical Objects> Material
>Create (General) > Immediately(i) Logistics>Plant Maintenance> Technical
Objects>Material>Create (General) > Immediately(j) Logistics>Sales & Distribution> Master data >Products >Bill
of Materials> Environment> Material Master >Material >
Create (General)(k) Logistics>Material Management>Material
master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
Via Transaction Code MM01
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 414/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 414
On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Key identifying material N/A Leave Blank System will provide number
IndustrySector
Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned
R Type T(Telecom Industry) orselect from pull down menu
MaterialType
Group to which material isassigned.
R Type Sub Assembly or selectfrom the Pull Down Menu
.
Copy From
Material:
Similar material from which th
system obtains selected values.
O Leave blank, unless new
material is based on anexisting material
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 415/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 415
On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes
Click on Basic Data 1, and any other views needed.
Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specif ic material types
wil l not contain certain views.
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 416/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 416
On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Organizati
onal Levels
Section Header
Plant Plant identification key O Enter Plant where material will
be active or select from pulldown menu
StorageLocation
Storage LocationIdentification key
O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or select
from pull down menu
Profiles Section Header
MRPProfile
MRP Parameters C Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that are
independent of the materialmaster record.
Forecast prof.
Forecast profile C Key that allows you to storeforecast parameters
independently of a materialmaster record.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 417/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 417
Enter.
On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 1 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 418/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 418
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Material Description R Enter in material description
Base Unitof Measure
Units of measure in whichstocks of the material are
managed
R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list
Material
Group
Key allowing grouping of
same or similar materials
R Enter Material Group
Old
Material
Number
Legacy system material numbe
previous SAP material master
O Enter if appropriate
X PlantMatl Status
Indicates whether the materialmay be used within different
departments
C Enter if appropriate As of now thisfield will not
be used.However
depending onrequirement,this can be
used afterimplementatio
n
Generic
Req. Number
Generic Requirement Number O Enter if Appropriate
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 419/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 419
On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 2 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 420/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 420
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Ind. StdDesc.
Description Of TheMaterial in accordancewith the appropriate
industry standard.
OPart Number to be maintained
Document Number of the drawing thatexists for this object.
O Drawing Number to bemaintained.
On the tab “Purchasing” enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 421/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 421
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 422/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 422
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Base Unitof Measure
Inventory UOM R Defaults in from Basic Data 1screen.
Not to bechanged orused here
Order Unit UOM for ordering O Enter only if different from
base UOM and required byVendor
If defined
here, orderingunit will becommon forall POs andhence
recommendedto be used atPO level and
not in purchasing
view
Purchasing
Group
Group Responsible for purchas
Material
R Enter or select from pull down li
Material
Group
Group code of like materials R Defaults in from Basic Data 1 sc Not to be
changed orused here
Plantsp.matl
status
Plant specific material status.Determines availability of
Material for purchase or production
O Blank indicates available As of now thisfield will not
be used.
BatchManageme
nt
Identifies the material asmanaged by batch O Check if appropriate It will bemaintained
only for thosematerials forwhich shelf
life needs to be maintained.
Purchasin
g Values
Section Heading
PurchasingValue Key
Identifies follow up intervalsand delivery tolerances
O Select appropriate key from pull down list
Other
Data
Section Heading
GRProcessing
time
Number of days required toinspect and place in storage
O Enter number of days ifrelevant
This will besame for
material type.However it
can be
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 423/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 423
different forindividual
material aswell.
Source List Mandates entry of supplier before PO issues
O Check box if appropriate It will bemaintained forProprietaryItems
Mfr. Partnumber
Manufacturer part number O Enter number if appropriate This field will be used to
capturemanufacturer's
part no. for
proprietaryitems only
Mfr. Manufacturer identifier O Use pull down menu This field will be used in
case of item is proprietary.
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 424/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 424
On tab “Purchase order text” enter appropriate text in the desired languages
and press enter. OPTIONAL
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 425/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 425
On tab “MRP1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 426/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 426
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
Data
Section Heading
Base Unit ofMeasure
Inventory Unit of measure R Enter the inventory unit ofmeasure for this product
Defaults ifBasic Data 1view exists
MRP
Procedure
Section Heading
MRP Type Identifies the type of MRP
/MPS to be performed
R Mainly, no planning (ND) and
manual reorder point planning(VB) will be used
After the
generation ofsufficient data
in the SAP,later onautomatic
reorder point planning (VM)
may beconsidered.
Reorder point Reorder point O Enter value
MRP
Controller
Code for the person
responsible for MRP/MPSfor this material
O Press F4 for list. Select desired
code from the list
Lot Size
Data Section Heading
Lot Size Identifies the type of LotSizing that will occur.
O "Replenish to maximum stock -HB" will be used.
Maximumstock level
Maximum stock levelallowed
O Enter value
Roundingvalue
Rounding value for purchase order quantity.
Value to a multiple ofwhich the system rounds up
the procurement quantity.
O Enter value
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 427/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 427
On tab “MRP2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 428/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 428
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Scheduling
Plnd DeliveryTime
Number of days required toobtain material obtainedexternally
O Enter number of days if needed
Enter
On tab “MRP3”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 429/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 429
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 430/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 430
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
AvailabilityCheck
Identifies whether totalrequirements by period areto be used or individual
Requirements
R Enter 01 (period) or 02(individual).
NOTE: This is the only
required field on this screen
Preferencedepends uponcompany
Tot. Repl.Lead Time
Total lead time for finished product, including production and procurement along thelongest path
O Enter time in days
Cross project Indicator for cross projectmaterial
O Use pull down menu
Enter.
On tab “Forecasting”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
Not Applicable
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
data
Section header
Forecastmodel
Indicator that defines onwhich forecast model the
system bases its calculation offuture requirements of thematerial.
R Use pull down to changedefault value
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 431/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 431
On tab “Plant data/stor. 1” enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 432/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 432
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
Data
Section Heading
Base Unit ofMeasure
Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list
Defaults fromBasic Data
Unit of Issue Unit in which material isissued
O Enter Unit of Issue or selectfrom pull down list
Storage bin Storage bin O Enter value is appropriate
Ph. Inv.Indicator forcycle
counting
Indicates that the givenmaterial is subject to thecycle counting method of
inventory. The indicatoralso defines at which time
intervals a physicalinventory is to be carriedout for the material
O Select from pull down menu
Shelf Life
Data Section Heading
Min. Rem.Shelf Life
Number of days materialneeds to be kept for thesystem to accept
O Enter number of days.
Total ShelfLife
Number of days materialwill keep in total
O Enter number of days
PeriodIndicator forshell life
The period indicatorspecifies the unit ofmeasurement for a period
of time
O Enter number of days
Old Material Number
Plant specific Old Material Number
O Enter Old Material Numbers
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 433/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 433
On tab “Plant data/stor.2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General plant parameters
Section header
Neg. stocks
in plant
Negative stocks allowed in
plant
O Check box as appropriate
Log.Handling
group
Logistics handling groupfor workload calculation
O Use pull down menu
Serial No. profile
Serial number profile O Use pull down menu
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 434/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 434
Dist. Prof Distribution profile ofmaterial in plant
O Use pull down menu
Profit center Profit center R Use pull down menu
Stockdetermination
Group
The stock determinationgroup combined with the
Stock Determination Ruleat plant level create a keyfor the stock determinationstrategy.
O Use pull down menu
Enter.
On tab “Quality management”, enter information in the fields as specified inthe below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 435/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 435
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General data Section header
Base Unit ofmeasure
Base unit of measure R defaults from Basic data View
Procurement
data
Section header
Inspection
type
The inspection type defines
how an inspection is performed. Severalinspection types can be
assigned to an inspection lot
O
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 436/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 436
origin.
QM controlkey
Control Key for QualityManagement in Procurement
O Use pull down menu
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 437/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 437
On tab “Accounting 1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 438/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 438
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
Data Section Heading
Base Unit ofMeasure
Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list
Defaults fromBasic Data.
ValuationCategory
Indicates whether stocksare valuated together or
separately
O Press F4 to call the menu list
Current
Valuation
Section Heading
Valuation
Class
Defines which group of
G/L accounts material isassigned
R Select from pull down menu to
change default value
Prom. stk val.Class Valuation Class for ProjectStock. Default value forthe valuation class forvaluated project stocks ofthe material.
R Use pull down menu
Price Control Defines whether material isvaluated with standard or
moving average price
R „V‟ – Moving Average Price Defaults infrom the
material type.
Mov. Avg.Price
Moving average price ofthe material
C Enter price
Enter.
On tab “Costing 1” and tab “Costing 2”, Only views will be maintained, no
field will be populated as of now.
Not Applicable
On tab “Plant stock ”, information is displayed regarding the stocks of this
material in this plant: Automatic
Not ApplicableEnter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 439/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 439
On tab “Stor. location stock”, information is displayed regarding the stocks
of this material in this storage location: Automatic
Not Applicable
Save to create the material using the “save” button or use the “Ctrl S” key combination.
To extend a material to add an additional department view:
Access transaction by:
Via Menus (a) Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
Via Transaction Code MM01
On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 440/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 440
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Key identifying material R Enter material number
IndustrySector
Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored for
this material
MaterialType
Group to which material isassigned.
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material
Copy FromMaterial:
Similar material from which thsystem
obtains selected values
O Leave blank.
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 441/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 441
On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes for the
screen(s) to be added.
Enter.
On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed will depend upon the views selected.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 442/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 442
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Organizati
onal Levels
Section Header
Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will be active or select from pull
down menu
StorageLocation
Storage LocationIdentification key
O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or select
from pull down menuProfiles Section Header
MRPProfile
MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that areindependent of the
Forecast
prof.
Forecast profile O Key that allows you to store
forecast parametersindependently of a materialmaster record.
Enter.
Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
this document on page 2).
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 443/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 443
To extend a material to another plant:
Access transaction by:
Via Menus (a) Logistics>Material Management>Material
master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>MaterialMaster>Material > Create(General)
Via Transaction Code MM01
On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 444/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 444
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Key identifying material R Enter material number
IndustrySector
Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material
MaterialType
Group to which material isassigned.
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored for
this material
Copy From
Material:
Similar material from which th
systemobtains selected values
O Leave blank.
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
Press Enter.
On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check at least one box other than the
basic data views.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 445/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 445
Enter.
On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter the plant number and other
information in the fields as specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed depends upon the screens selected.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 446/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 446
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Organizati
onal Levels
Section Header
Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will be active or select from pull
down menu
Storage
Location
Storage Location
Identification key
O Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menuProfiles Section Header
MRP
Profile
MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that areindependent of the
Forecast prof.
Forecast profile O Key that allows you to storeforecast parametersindependently of a materialmaster record.
Enter.
Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents forth is document on above pages).
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 447/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 447
13. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZSOA
Overview
A material master is required for a material.
A material needs to have additional department views created.
A new material is to be used in a production process.
A material needs to be extended to another plant.
Requirement for Valuation of material in the Material Master.
A need to define a Production Resource / Tool as a Material.
Business Process Description Overview
Material masters are created when a material required is not defined in the material master. Control ofmaster data depends largely on how each company sets up its Organizational levels - centralized ordecentralized. Some material data is valid for all organizational levels while other data is valid only at
certain levels. (i.e.: client, plant, sales org., etc.). All functional areas of the system use the same materialmaster data. The material master data is defined in individual screens (departmental views) that can be
added as needed. Thus a material can be created with only basic data and other departments can addother information later as it becomes available.
The views possible for material are controlled by the material type selected.
For a material to be used in the system it needs to be created for each plant. Multiple views of a materialare possible but at a minimum, the material needs to have a description and a base unit of measureassigned on the basic data view. Additional department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, andMRP) can be added at a later time by extending the material. As additional plants are added, a materialwill need to be extended to the plants before it can be used there.
A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions areto be carried out for that PRT.
The information required to be input is dependent upon which department views are being created.
Thus, material master information is typically entered at different times by numerous system users. Note that to add a view, the “Create Material” transaction is used rather than the “Change Material”transaction.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 448/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 448
Input - Required Fields Field Value / Comments
Material Not required as system will assign a new number
Industry Sector Enter T for Telecom Industry
Material Type Press F4 for list of choices. Select “ZSOA” for Material Type – Scrap of Asset
Base Unit of Measure Enter the inventory unit of measure (Example EA,PC, LB, GA)
Other information Depending upon the views to be created, additional informationwill be required
Output - Results Comments New material created Material Created and available for other activities
New view added to a material View AddedMaterial extended to a new plant Material extended
BPP Table of Contents
Since a material can have from 1 to more than 30 views depending upon the material type and views
desired, a user should select the relevant sections of this document and ignore the views that are notdesired. The procedural steps included in this document are as follows:
Basic Data
Purchasing
Purchase Order Text
MRP
Forecasting
Plant data/storage
Quality mgt.
Accounting
Costing
Plant stock
Storage location stock
Extending a material to add a departmental view Extending a material to another plant
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 449/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 449
Tips and Tricks
If no other view exists, you must enter the base (standard / inventory) Unit of measure and a
material description.
Using a reference material (similar characteristics etc.) saves a lot of effort as all the views will be
copied over and can be changed or overwritten.
Note: When creating the MRP Views (or any view for that matter), the Industry Sector and Material
type will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least one view exists.
The material data can be entered with or without an MRP profile. An MRP profile contains typicalMRP data for a particular procedure. The values can be fixed (cannot be changed) of default values
(can be overridden). The MRP profile simplifies data entry in the master record. For example if an
MRP controller looks after similar material at several plants, a profile will be defined in the system
and assigned to new materials as they are created.
To set user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:
Views:
Menus: Defaults >> Views
Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a new
material.
Select ‘View selection only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to be by-
passed unless selected.
Organizational levels:
Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels
Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a new
material.
Select ‘Org. levels/profiles only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to
be by-passed unless selected.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 450/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 450
To extend a material to a different plant requires selecting the new plant on the organizational levelscreen. Note that all views of a material are not extended unless they were selected on the initial
screen. In addition, each plant may have a different system configuration requiring additional inputson each of the departmental screens. Material changes made in one plant do not change that material
in other plants.
To determine which views of a material need to be added or to see which plants a material has beenextended to, use transaction MM50 (Logistics>Material Management>Material
Master>Other>Extend Material View(s)).
Procedure Steps
Access transaction by:
Via Menus
(a) Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediate
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)(d) Logistics> Logistics Execution> Master Data > Material >
Material > Create>Immediately(e) Logistics>Central function >Engineering> Material
>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(f) Accounting>Project Systems > Basic Data > Master Data>Material>Create
(g) Logistics>Environmental Health & Safety> DangerousGoods Management> Environment> Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(h) Logistics>Customer Service > Technical Objects> Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(i) Logistics>Plant Maintenance> TechnicalObjects>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(j) Logistics>Sales & Distribution> Master data >Products >Bill
of Materials> Environment> Material Master >Material >Create (General)
(k) Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
Via Transaction Code MM01
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 451/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 451
On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values CommentsMaterial Key identifying material N/A Leave Blank System will provide number
IndustrySector
Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned
R Type T(Telecom Industry) orselect from pull down menu
Material
Type
Group to which material is
assigned.
R Type ZSOA Scrap of Asset or
select from the Pull DownMenu
.
Copy FromMaterial:
Similar material from which thsystem obtains selected values.
O Leave blank, unless newmaterial is based on an
existing material
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 452/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 452
On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes
Click on Basic Data 1, and any other views needed.
Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specif ic materi al types
wil l not contain certain views.
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 453/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 453
On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Organizati
onal Levels
Section Header
Plant Plant identification key O Enter Plant where material will
be active or select from pulldown menu
StorageLocation
Storage LocationIdentification key
O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or select
from pull down menu
Profiles Section Header
MRPProfile
MRP Parameters C Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that are
independent of the materialmaster record.
Forecast prof.
Forecast profile C Key that allows you to storeforecast parameters
independently of a materialmaster record.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 454/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 454
Enter.
On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 1 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 455/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 455
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Material Description R Enter in material description
Base Unitof Measure
Units of measure in whichstocks of the material are
managed
R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list
Material
Group
Key allowing grouping of
same or similar materials
R Enter Material Group
Old
Material
Number
Legacy system material numbe
previous SAP material master
O Enter if appropriate
X PlantMatl Status
Indicates whether the materialmay be used within different
departments
C Enter if appropriate As of now thisfield will not
be used.However
depending onrequirement,this can be
used afterimplementatio
n
Generic
Req. Number
Generic Requirement Number O Enter if Appropriate
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 456/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 456
On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 2 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 457/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 457
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Ind. StdDesc.
Description Of TheMaterial in accordancewith the appropriate
industry standard.
OPart Number to be maintained
Document Number of the drawing thatexists for this object.
O Drawing Number to bemaintained.
On the tab “Purchasing” enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
Not Applicable
Enter.
On tab “Purchase order text” enter appropriate text in the desired languages
and press enter.
Not Applicable
On tab “MRP1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 458/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 458
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 459/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 459
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
Data Section Heading
Base Unit ofMeasure
Inventory Unit of measure R Enter the inventory unit ofmeasure for this product
Defaults ifBasic Data 1
view exists
MRP
Procedure Section Heading
MRP Type Identifies the type of MRP/MPS to be performed
R Mainly, no planning (ND) andmanual reorder point planning(VB) will be used
After thegeneration ofsufficient datain the SAP,later on
automaticreorder point
planning (VM)may beconsidered.
Reorder point Reorder point O Enter value
MRPController
Code for the personresponsible for MRP/MPSfor this material
O Press F4 for list. Select desiredcode from the list
Lot Size
Data
Section Heading
Lot Size Identifies the type of LotSizing that will occur. O "Replenish to maximum stock -HB" will be used.
Maximum
stock level
Maximum stock level
allowed
O Enter value
Rounding
value
Rounding value for
purchase order quantity.Value to a multiple ofwhich the system rounds upthe procurement quantity.
O Enter value
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 460/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 460
On tab “MRP2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 461/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 461
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Scheduling
Plnd Delivery
Time
Number of days required to
obtain material obtainedexternally
O Enter number of days if needed
Enter
On tab “MRP3”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 462/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 462
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 463/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 463
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
AvailabilityCheck
Identifies whether totalrequirements by period areto be used or individual
Requirements
R Enter 01 (period) or 02(individual).
NOTE: This is the only
required field on this screen
Preferencedepends uponcompany
Tot. Repl.Lead Time
Total lead time for finished product, including production and procurement along thelongest path
O Enter time in days
Cross project Indicator for cross projectmaterial
O Use pull down menu
Enter.
On tab “Forecasting”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
Not Applicable
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
data
Section header
Forecastmodel
Indicator that defines onwhich forecast model the
system bases its calculation offuture requirements of thematerial.
R Use pull down to changedefault value
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 464/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 464
On tab “Plant data/stor. 1” enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 465/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 465
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
Data
Section Heading
Base Unit of
Measure
Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pull
down list
Defaults from
Basic Data
Unit of Issue Unit in which material is
issued
O Enter Unit of Issue or select
from pull down list
Storage bin Storage bin O Enter value is appropriate
Ph. Inv.Indicator for
cyclecounting
Indicates that the givenmaterial is subject to the
cycle counting method ofinventory. The indicator
also defines at which timeintervals a physicalinventory is to be carried
out for the material
O Select from pull down menu
Shelf Life
Data
Section Heading
Min. Rem.
Shelf Life
Number of days material
needs to be kept for thesystem to accept
O Enter number of days.
Total ShelfLife
Number of days materialwill keep in total
O Enter number of days
Period
Indicator forshell life
The period indicator
specifies the unit ofmeasurement for a periodof time
O Enter number of days
Old Material Number
Plant specific Old Material Number
O Enter Old Material Numbers
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 466/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 466
On tab “Plant data/stor.2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General plant parameters
Section header
Neg. stocksin plant
Negative stocks allowed in plant
O Check box as appropriate
Log.
Handlinggroup
Logistics handling group
for workload calculation
O Use pull down menu
Serial No. Serial number profile O Use pull down menu
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 467/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 467
profile
Dist. Prof Distribution profile ofmaterial in plant
O Use pull down menu
Profit center Profit center R Use pull down menu
Stock
determinationGroup
The stock determination
group combined with theStock Determination Rule
at plant level create a keyfor the stock determinationstrategy.
O Use pull down menu
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 468/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 468
n tab “Quality management”, enter information in the fields as specified in
the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 469/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 469
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General data Section header
Base Unit ofmeasure
Base unit of measure R defaults from Basic data View
Procurement
data
Section header
Inspection
type
The inspection type defines
how an inspection is performed. Several
inspection types can beassigned to an inspection lotorigin.
O
QM control
key
Control Key for Quality
Management in Procurement
O Use pull down menu
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 470/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 470
On tab “Accounting 1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 471/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 471
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
Data Section Heading
Base Unit ofMeasure
Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list
Defaults fromBasic Data.
ValuationCategory
Indicates whether stocksare valuated together or
separately
R Press F4 to call the menu list
Current
Valuation
Section Heading
Valuation
Class
Defines which group of
G/L accounts material isassigned
R Select from pull down menu to
change default value
Prom. stk val.Class Valuation Class for ProjectStock. Default value forthe valuation class forvaluated project stocks ofthe material.
R Use pull down menu
Price Control Defines whether material isvaluated with standard or
moving average price
R „S‟ – Standard Price Defaults infrom the
material type.
StandardPrice
Standard price of thematerial
C Enter price
Enter.
On tab “Costing 1” and tab “Costing 2”, Only views will be maintained, no
field will be populated as of now.
Not Applicable
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 472/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 472
On tab “Plant stock”, information is displayed regarding the stocks of this
material in this plant: Automatic
Not Applicable
Enter.
On tab “Stor. location stock”, information is displayed regarding the stocks
of this material in this storage location: Automatic
Not Applicable
Save to create the material using the “save” button or use the “Ctrl S” key combination.
To extend a material to add an additional department view:
Access transaction by:
Via Menus (a) Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
Via Transaction Code MM01
On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 473/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 473
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Key identifying material R Enter material number
IndustrySector
Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored for
this materialMaterialType
Group to which material isassigned.
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material
Copy FromMaterial:
Similar material from which thsystem
obtains selected values
O Leave blank.
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 474/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 474
On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes for the
screen(s) to be added.
Enter.
On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed will depend upon the views selected.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 475/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 475
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Organizati
onal Levels
Section Header
Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will be active or select from pull
down menu
StorageLocation
Storage LocationIdentification key
O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or select
from pull down menuProfiles Section Header
MRPProfile
MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that areindependent of the
Forecast
prof.
Forecast profile O Key that allows you to store
forecast parametersindependently of a materialmaster record.
Enter.
Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
this document on page 2).
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 476/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 476
To extend a material to another plant:
Access transaction by:
Via Menus (a) Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
Via Transaction Code MM01
On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 477/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 477
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Key identifying material R Enter material number
IndustrySector
Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material
MaterialType
Group to which material isassigned.
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored for
this material
Copy From
Material:
Similar material from which th
systemobtains selected values
O Leave blank.
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
Press Enter.
On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check at least one box other than the
basic data views.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 478/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 478
Enter.
On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter the plant number and other
information in the fields as specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed depends upon the screens selected.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 479/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 479
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Organizati
onal Levels
Section Header
Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will be active or select from pull
down menu
Storage
Location
Storage Location
Identification key
O Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or select
from pull down menuProfiles Section Header
MRP
Profile
MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that areindependent of the
Forecast prof.
Forecast profile O Key that allows you to storeforecast parametersindependently of a materialmaster record.
Enter.
Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
th is document on above pages).
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 480/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 480
14. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZSOI
Overview
A material master is required for a material.
A material needs to have additional department views created.
A new material is to be used in a production process.
A material needs to be extended to another plant.
Requirement for Valuation of material in the Material Master.
A need to define a Production Resource / Tool as a Material.
Business Process Description Overview
Material masters are created when a material required is not defined in the material master. Control ofmaster data depends largely on how each company sets up its Organizational levels - centralized ordecentralized. Some material data is valid for all organizational levels while other data is valid only at
certain levels. (i.e.: client, plant, sales org., etc.). All functional areas of the system use the same materialmaster data. The material master data is defined in individual screens (departmental views) that can be
added as needed. Thus a material can be created with only basic data and other departments can addother information later as it becomes available.
The views possible for material are controlled by the material type selected.
For a material to be used in the system it needs to be created for each plant. Multiple views of a materialare possible but at a minimum, the material needs to have a description and a base unit of measureassigned on the basic data view. Additional department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, MRP)
can be added at a later time by extending the material. As additional plants are added, a material willneed to be extended to the plants before it can be used there.
A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions areto be carried out for that PRT.
The information required to be input is dependent upon which department views are being created.
Thus, material master information is typically entered at different times by numerous system users. Note that to add a view, the “Create Material” transaction is used rather than the “Change Material”
transaction.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 481/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 481
Input - Required Fields Field Value / Comments
MaterialRequired as using external numbers.
Industry Sector Enter T Telecom Industry
Material Type Press F4 to call the list of choices. Select “ZSOI” for MaterialType – Scrap of Inventory
Base Unit of Measure Enter the inventory unit of measure (Example PC, EA)
Other information Depending upon the views to be created, additional informationwill be required
Output - Results Comments New material created Material Created and available for other activities
New view added to a material View AddedMaterial extended to a new plant Material extended
BPP Table of Contents
Since a material can have from 1 to more than 30 views depending upon the material type and viewsdesired, a user should select the relevant sections of this document and ignore the views that are not
desired. The procedural steps included in this document are as follows:
Basic Data
Purchasing
Purchase Order Text
MRP
Forecasting
Plant data/storage
Quality mgt.
Accounting
Costing
Plant stock
Storage location stock Extending a material to add a departmental view
Extending a material to another plant
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 482/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 482
Tips and Tricks
If no other view exists, you must enter the base (standard / inventory) Unit of measure and a
material description.
Using a reference material (similar characteristics etc.) saves a lot of effort as all the views will be
copied over and can be changed or overwritten.
Note: When creating the MRP Views (or any view for that matter), the Industry Sector and Material
type will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least one view exists.
The material data can be entered with or without an MRP profile. An MRP profile contains typicalMRP data for a particular procedure. The values can be fixed (cannot be changed) of default values
(can be overridden). The MRP profile simplifies data entry in the master record. For example if an
MRP controller looks after similar material at several plants, a profile will be defined in the system
and assigned to new materials as they are created.
To set user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:
Views:
Menus: Defaults >> Views
Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a new
material.
Select ‘View selection only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to be by-
passed unless selected.
Organizational levels:
Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels
Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a new
material.
Select ‘Org. levels/profiles only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to
be by-passed unless selected.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 483/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 483
To extend a material to a different plant requires selecting the new plant on the organizational levelscreen. Note that all views of a material are not extended unless they were selected on the initial
screen. In addition, each plant may have a different system configuration requiring additional inputson each of the departmental screens. Material changes made in one plant do not change that material
in other plants.
To determine which views of a material need to be added or to see which plants a material has beenextended to, use transaction MM50 (Logistics>Material Management>Material
Master>Other>Extend Material View(s)).
Procedure Steps
Access transaction by:
Via Menus
(a) Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediate
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>MaterialMaster>Material > Create(General)
(d) Logistics> Logistics Execution> Master Data > Material >Material > Create>Immediately
(e) Logistics>Central function >Engineering> Material
>Material>Create (General) > Immediately(f) Accounting>Project Systems > Basic Data > Master Data
>Material>Create(g) Logistics>Environmental Health & Safety> Dangerous
Goods Management> Environment> Material
master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately(h) Logistics>Customer Service > Technical Objects> Material
>Create (General) > Immediately(i) Logistics>Plant Maintenance> Technical
Objects>Material>Create (General) > Immediately(j) Logistics>Sales & Distribution> Master data >Products >Bill
of Materials> Environment> Material Master >Material >
Create (General)(k) Logistics>Material Management>Material
master>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
Via Transaction Code MM01
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 484/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 484
On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Key identifying material N/A Leave Blank, as this is internalno assignment. System willassign a new no for thematerial
IndustrySector
Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned
R Type T (Telecom Industry) orselect from pull down menu
MaterialType
Group to which material isassigned.
R Type ZSOI or select from thePull Down Menu
.
Copy FromMaterial:
Similar material from which thsystem obtains selected values.
O Leave blank, unless newmaterial is based on anexisting material
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 485/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 485
On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes
Click on Basic Data 1, and any other views needed.
Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specif ic materi al types
wil l not contain certain views.
Press Enter.
On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 486/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 486
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Organizati
onal Levels
Section Header
Plant Plant identification key O Enter Plant where material will
be active or select from pulldown menu
StorageLocation
Storage LocationIdentification key
O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or select
from pull down menu
Profiles Section HeaderMRPProfile
MRP Parameters C Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that are
independent of the materialmaster record.
Forecast prof.
Forecast profile C Key that allows you to storeforecast parameters
independently of a materialmaster record.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 487/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 487
Enter.
On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 1 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 488/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 488
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Material Description R Enter in material description
Base Unit
of Measure
Units of measure in which
stocks of the material aremanaged
R Enter UOM or select from pull
down list
MaterialGroup
Key allowing grouping ofsame or similar materials
R Enter Material Group
OldMaterial
Number
Legacy system material number previous SAP material master n
O Enter if appropriate
X PlantMatl Status
Indicates whether the materialmay be used within differentdepartments
C Enter if appropriate As of now thisfield will not
be used.
Howeverdepending on
requirement,this can beused after
implementation
GenericReq.
Number
Generic Requirement Number O Enter if Appropriate
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 489/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 489
On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 2 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 490/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 490
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Ind. StdDesc.
Description Of TheMaterial in accordancewith the appropriate
industry standard.
OPart Number to be maintained
Document Number of the drawing thatexists for this object.
O Drawing Number to bemaintained.
On the tab “Purchasing” enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
Not Applicable
Enter.
On tab “Purchase order text” enter appropriate text in the desired languages
and press enter. OPTIONAL
Not Applicable
On tab “MRP1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 491/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 491
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
Data Section Heading
Base Unit ofMeasure
Inventory Unit of measure R Enter the inventory unit ofmeasure for this product
Defaults ifBasic Data 1view exists
MRP
Procedure
Section Heading
MRP Type Identifies the type of MRP/MPS to be performed
R Mainly, no planning (ND) andmanual reorder point planning(VB) will be used
After thegeneration ofsufficient data
in the SAP,later on
automatic
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 492/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 492
reorder point planning (VM)
may beconsidered.
Reorder point Reorder point O Enter value
MRPController
Code for the personresponsible for MRP/MPSfor this material
O Press F4 for list. Select desiredcode from the list
Lot Size
Data Section Heading
Lot Size Identifies the type of LotSizing that will occur.
O "Replenish to maximum stock -HB" will be used.
Maximum
stock level
Maximum stock level
allowed
O Enter value
Roundingvalue
Rounding value for purchase order quantity.Value to a multiple ofwhich the system rounds up
the procurement quantity.
O Enter value
Enter.
On tab “MRP2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 493/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 493
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
SchedulingPlnd Delivery
Time
Number of days required to
obtain material obtainedexternally
O Enter number of days if needed
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 494/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 494
Enter
On tab “MRP3”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 495/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 495
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
AvailabilityCheck
Identifies whether totalrequirements by period areto be used or individual
Requirements
R Enter 01 (period) or 02(individual).
NOTE: This is the only
required field on this screen
Preferencedepends uponcompany
Tot. Repl.
Lead Time
Total lead time for finished
product, including production and procurement along the
longest path
O Enter time in days
Cross project Indicator for cross project
material
O Use pull down menu
Enter.
On tab “Forecasting”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
Not Applicable
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
data
Section header
Forecastmodel
Indicator that defines onwhich forecast model the
system bases its calculation offuture requirements of the
material.
R Use pull down to changedefault value
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 496/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 496
On tab “Plant data/stor. 1” enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 497/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 497
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
Data Section Heading
Base Unit ofMeasure
Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list
Defaults fromBasic Data
Unit of Issue Unit in which material isissued
O Enter Unit of Issue or selectfrom pull down list
Storage bin Storage bin O Enter value is appropriate
Ph. Inv.Indicator for
cyclecounting
Indicates that the givenmaterial is subject to the
cycle counting method ofinventory. The indicator
also defines at which timeintervals a physicalinventory is to be carriedout for the material
O Select from pull down menu
Shelf Life
Data
Section Heading
Min. Rem.Shelf Life
Number of days materialneeds to be kept for thesystem to accept
O Enter number of days.
Total Shelf
Life
Number of days material
will keep in total
O Enter number of days
PeriodIndicator for
shell life
The period indicatorspecifies the unit of
measurement for a periodof time
O Enter number of days
Old Material Number
Plant Specific Old materialnumber
O Enter Old Material Number
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 498/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 498
On tab “Plant data/stor.2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 499/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 499
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General plant parameters
Section header
Neg. stocksin plant
Negative stocks allowed in plant
O Check box as appropriate
Log.Handling
group
Logistics handling groupfor workload calculation
O Use pull down menu
Serial No.
profile
Serial number profile O Use pull down menu
Dist. Prof Distribution profile of
material in plant
O Use pull down menu
Profit center Profit center R Use pull down menu
Stockdetermin.
Group
The stock determinationgroup combined with the
Stock Determination Ruleat plant level create a key
for the stock determinationstrategy.
O Use pull down menu
Enter
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 500/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 500
On tab “Quality management”, enter information in the fields as specified in
the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 501/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 501
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General data Section header
Base Unit ofmeasure
Base unit of measure R defaults from Basic data View
Procurement
data
Section header
Inspection
type
The inspection type defines
how an inspection is performed. Several
inspection types can beassigned to an inspection lotorigin.
O
QM control
key
Control Key for Quality
Management in Procurement
O Use pull down menu
Enter.
On tab “Accounting 1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 502/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 502
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 503/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 503
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
Data Section Heading
Base Unit ofMeasure
Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list
Defaults fromBasic Data.
ValuationCategory
Indicates whether stocksare valuated together or
separately
O
Current
Valuation
Section Heading
Valuation
Class
Defines which group of
G/L accounts material isassigned
R Select from pull down menu to
change default value
Prom. stk val.Class Valuation Class for ProjectStock. Default value forthe valuation class forvaluated project stocks ofthe material.
R Use pull down menu
Price Control Defines whether material isvaluated with standard or
moving average price
R „V‟ – Moving Average Price Defaults infrom the
material type.
Mov. Avg.Price
Moving average price ofthe material
C Enter price
Enter.
On tab “Costing 1” and tab “Costing 2”, Only views will be maintained, no
field will be populated as of now.
Not Applicable
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 504/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 504
On tab “Plant stock ”, information is displayed regarding the stocks of this
material in this plant: AutomaticNot Applicable
On tab “Stor. location stock”, information is displayed regarding the stocks
of this material in this storage location: Automatic
Not Applicable
Save to create the material using the “save” button or use the “Ctrl S” key combination.
To extend a material to add an additional department view:
Access transaction by:
Via Menus (a) Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>MaterialMaster>Material > Create(General)
Via Transaction Code MM01
On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 505/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 505
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Key identifying material R Enter material number
Industry
Sector
Specifies branch of industry
to which material is assigned
O Leave blank. System will
default in the value stored for
this materialMaterialType
Group to which material isassigned.
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material
Copy From
Material:
Similar material from which th
systemobtains selected values
O Leave blank.
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 506/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 506
On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes for the
screen(s) to be added.
Enter.
On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed will depend upon the views selected.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 507/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 507
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Organizati
onal Levels
Section Header
Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will
be active or select from pulldown menu
Storage
Location
Storage Location
Identification key
O Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or selectfrom pull down menu
Profiles Section Header
MRPProfile
MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that areindependent of the
Forecast prof.
Forecast profile O Key that allows you to storeforecast parametersindependently of a material
master record.
Enter.
Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
this document on page 2).
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 508/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 508
To extend a material to another plant:
Access transaction by:
Via Menus (a) Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
Via Transaction Code MM01
On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values CommentsMaterial Key identifying material R Enter material number
IndustrySector
Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material
Material Group to which material is O Leave blank. System will
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 509/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 509
Type assigned. default in the value stored forthis material
Copy FromMaterial:
Similar material from which thsystem
obtains selected values
O Leave blank.
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
Press Enter.
On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check at least one box other than the
basic data views.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 510/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 510
Enter.
On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter the plant number and other
information in the fields as specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed depends upon the screens selected.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 511/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 511
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Organizati
onal Levels
Section Header
Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will be active or select from pulldown menu
StorageLocation
Storage LocationIdentification key
O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or selectfrom pull down menu
Profiles Section HeaderMRP
Profile
MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that areindependent of the
Forecast prof.
Forecast profile O Key that allows you to storeforecast parameters
independently of a materialmaster record.
Enter.
Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
th is document on above pages).
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 512/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 512
15. MM-MM01-Material-Create-ZTCS
Overview
A material master is required for a material.
A material needs to have additional department views created.
A new material is to be used in a production process.
A material needs to be extended to another plant.
Requirement for Valuation of material in the Material Master.
A need to define a Production Resource / Tool as a Material.
Business Process Description Overview
Material masters are created when a material required is not defined in the material master. Control ofmaster data depends largely on how each company sets up its Organizational levels - centralized ordecentralized. Some material data is valid for all organizational levels while other data is valid only at
certain levels. (i.e.: client, plant, sales org., etc.). All functional areas of the system use the same materialmaster data. The material master data is defined in individual screens (departmental views) that can be
added as needed. Thus a material can be created with only basic data and other departments can addother information later as it becomes available.
The views possible for material are controlled by the material type selected.
For a material to be used in the system it needs to be created for each plant. Multiple views of a materialare possible but at a minimum, the material needs to have a description and a base unit of measureassigned on the basic data view. Additional department views (i.e. Accounting, Sales, Purchasing, MRP)can be added at a later time by extending the material. As additional plants are added, a material willneed to be extended to the plants before it can be used there.
A Production Resource / Tool can be defined as a material if purchasing and inventory functions areto be carried out for that PRT.
The information required to be input is dependent upon which department views are being created.
Thus, material master information is typically entered at different times by numerous system users. Note that to add a view, the “Create Material” transaction is used rather than the “Change Material”transaction.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 513/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 513
Input - Required Fields Field Value / Comments
MaterialRequired as using external numbers.
Industry Sector Enter T Telecom Industry
Material Type Press F4 to call the list of choices. Select “ZTCS” for MaterialType – Telecom & Spares
Base Unit of Measure Enter the inventory unit of measure (Example PC, EA)
Other information Depending upon the views to be created, additional informationwill be required
Output - Results Comments New material created Material Created and available for other activities
New view added to a material View AddedMaterial extended to a new plant Material extended
BPP Table of Contents
Since a material can have from 1 to more than 30 views depending upon the material type and viewsdesired, a user should select the relevant sections of this document and ignore the views that are notdesired. The procedural steps included in this document are as follows:
Basic Data
Purchasing
Purchase Order Text
MRP
Forecasting
Plant data/storage
Quality mgt.
Accounting
Costing
Plant stock
Storage location stock
Extending a material to add a departmental view
Extending a material to another plant
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 514/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 514
Tips and Tricks
If no other view exists, you must enter the base (standard / inventory) Unit of measure and a
material description.
Using a reference material (similar characteristics etc.) saves a lot of effort as all the views will be
copied over and can be changed or overwritten.
Note: When creating the MRP Views (or any view for that matter), the Industry Sector and Material
type will be automatically copied from an existing view, so long as at least one view exists.
The material data can be entered with or without an MRP profile. An MRP profile contains typicalMRP data for a particular procedure. The values can be fixed (cannot be changed) of default values
(can be overridden). The MRP profile simplifies data entry in the master record. For example if an
MRP controller looks after similar material at several plants, a profile will be defined in the system
and assigned to new materials as they are created.
To set user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:
Views:
Menus: Defaults >> Views
Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a new
material.
Select ‘View selection only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to be by-
passed unless selected.
Organizational levels:
Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels
Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a new
material.
Select ‘Org. levels/profiles only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to
be by-passed unless selected.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 515/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 515
To extend a material to a different plant requires selecting the new plant on the organizational levelscreen. Note that all views of a material are not extended unless they were selected on the initial
screen. In addition, each plant may have a different system configuration requiring additional inputson each of the departmental screens. Material changes made in one plant do not change that material
in other plants.
To determine which views of a material need to be added or to see which plants a material has beenextended to, use transaction MM50 (Logistics>Material Management>Material
Master>Other>Extend Material View(s)).
Procedure Steps
Access transaction by:
Via Menus (a) Logistics>Material Management>Material
master>Material>Create (General) > Immediate(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)(d) Logistics> Logistics Execution> Master Data > Material >
Material > Create>Immediately
(e) Logistics>Central function >Engineering> Material>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(f) Accounting>Project Systems > Basic Data > Master Data>Material>Create
(g) Logistics>Environmental Health & Safety> DangerousGoods Management> Environment> Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(h) Logistics>Customer Service > Technical Objects> Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(i) Logistics>Plant Maintenance> Technical
Objects>Material>Create (General) > Immediately(j) Logistics>Sales & Distribution> Master data >Products >Bill
of Materials> Environment> Material Master >Material >Create (General)
(k) Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
Via Transaction Code MM01
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 516/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 516
On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Key identifying material N/A Leave Blank, as this is internal
no assignment. System willassign a new no for thematerial
IndustrySector
Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned
R Type T (Telecom Industry) orselect from pull down menu
MaterialType
Group to which material isassigned.
R Type ZTCS or select from thePull Down Menu
.
Copy FromMaterial:
Similar material from which thsystem obtains selected values.
O Leave blank, unless newmaterial is based on an
existing material
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 517/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 517
On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes
Click on Basic Data 1, and any other views needed.
Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specif ic materi al types
wil l not contain certain views.
Press Enter.
On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 518/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 518
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Organizati
onal Levels
Section Header
Plant Plant identification key O Enter Plant where material will
be active or select from pulldown menu
Storage
Location
Storage Location
Identification key
O Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or selectfrom pull down menu
Profiles Section Header
MRPProfile
MRP Parameters C Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that are
independent of the materialmaster record.
Forecast prof.
Forecast profile C Key that allows you to storeforecast parameters
independently of a materialmaster record.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 519/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 519
Enter.
On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 1 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 520/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 520
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Material Description R Enter in material description
Base Unit
of Measure
Units of measure in which
stocks of the material aremanaged
R Enter UOM or select from pull
down list
MaterialGroup
Key allowing grouping ofsame or similar materials
R Enter Material Group
OldMaterial
Number
Legacy system material number previous SAP material master n
O Enter if appropriate
X PlantMatl Status
Indicates whether the materialmay be used within differentdepartments
C Enter if appropriate As of now thisfield will not
be used.
Howeverdepending onrequirement,
this can beused after
implementation
GenericReq.
Number
Generic Requirement Number O Enter if Appropriate
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 521/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 521
On screen “Create Material –######## (Material Type)”, Basic Data 2 tab,
enter information in the fields as specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 522/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 522
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Ind. Std
Desc.
Description Of The
Material in accordancewith the appropriateindustry standard.
O
Part Number to be maintained
Document Number of the drawing thatexists for this object.
O Drawing Number to bemaintained.
On the tab “Purchasing” enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 523/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 523
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 524/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 524
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Base Unitof Measure
Inventory UOM R Defaults in from Basic Data 1screen.
Not to bechanged orused here
Order Unit UOM for ordering O Enter only if different from
base UOM and required byVendor
If defined
here, orderingunit will becommon forall POs andhence
recommendedto be used atPO level and
not in purchasing
view
Purchasing
Group
Group Responsible for purchas
Material
R Enter or select from pull down li
Material
Group
Group code of like materials R Defaults in from Basic Data 1 sc Not to be
changed orused here
Plantsp.matl
status
Plant specific material status.Determines availability of
Material for purchase or production
O Blank indicates available As of now thisfield will not
be used.
BatchManageme
nt
Identifies the material asmanaged by batch O Check if appropriate It will bemaintained
only for thosematerials forwhich shelf
life needs to be maintained.
Purchasin
g Values
Section Heading
PurchasingValue Key
Identifies follow up intervalsand delivery tolerances
O Select appropriate key from pull down list
Other
Data
Section Heading
GRProcessing
time
Number of days required toinspect and place in storage
O Enter number of days ifrelevant
This will besame for
material type.However it
can be
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 525/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 525
different forindividual
material aswell.
Source List Mandates entry of supplier before PO issues
O Check box if appropriate It will bemaintained forProprietaryItems
Mfr. Partnumber
Manufacturer part number O Enter number if appropriate This field will be used to
capturemanufacturer's
part no. for
proprietaryitems only
Mfr. Manufacturer identifier O Use pull down menu This field will be used in
case of item is proprietary.
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 526/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 526
On tab “Purchase order text” enter appropriate text in the desired languages
and press enter. OPTIONAL
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 527/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 527
On tab “MRP1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 528/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 528
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
Data Section Heading
Base Unit ofMeasure
Inventory Unit of measure R Enter the inventory unit ofmeasure for this product
Defaults ifBasic Data 1
view exists
MRP
Procedure Section Heading
MRP Type Identifies the type of MRP/MPS to be performed
R Mainly, no planning (ND) andmanual reorder point planning(VB) will be used
After thegeneration ofsufficient datain the SAP,later on
automaticreorder point
planning (VM)may beconsidered.
Reorder point Reorder point O Enter value
MRPController
Code for the personresponsible for MRP/MPSfor this material
O Press F4 for list. Select desiredcode from the list
Lot Size
Data
Section Heading
Lot Size Identifies the type of LotSizing that will occur. O "Replenish to maximum stock -HB" will be used.
Maximum
stock level
Maximum stock level
allowed
O Enter value
Rounding
value
Rounding value for
purchase order quantity.Value to a multiple ofwhich the system rounds upthe procurement quantity.
O Enter value
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 529/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 529
On tab “MRP2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 530/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 530
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Scheduling
Plnd DeliveryTime
Number of days required toobtain material obtainedexternally
O Enter number of days if needed
Enter
On tab “MRP3”, enter information in the fields as specified in the below
table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 531/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 531
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 532/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 532
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
AvailabilityCheck
Identifies whether totalrequirements by period areto be used or individual
Requirements
R Enter 01 (period) or 02(individual).
NOTE: This is the only
required field on this screen
Preferencedepends uponcompany
Tot. Repl.Lead Time
Total lead time for finished product, including production and procurement along thelongest path
O Enter time in days
Cross project Indicator for cross projectmaterial
O Use pull down menu
Enter.
On tab “Forecasting”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
Not Applicable
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values CommentsGeneral
data
Section header
Forecast
model
Indicator that defines on
which forecast model thesystem bases its calculation offuture requirements of thematerial.
R Use pull down to change
default value
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 533/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 533
On tab “Plant data/stor. 1” enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 534/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 534
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
Data Section Heading
Base Unit ofMeasure
Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pulldown list
Defaults fromBasic Data
Unit of Issue Unit in which material isissued
O Enter Unit of Issue or selectfrom pull down list
Storage bin Storage bin O Enter value is appropriate
Ph. Inv.Indicator for
cyclecounting
Indicates that the givenmaterial is subject to the
cycle counting method ofinventory. The indicator
also defines at which timeintervals a physicalinventory is to be carriedout for the material
O Select from pull down menu
Shelf Life
Data
Section Heading
Min. Rem.Shelf Life
Number of days materialneeds to be kept for thesystem to accept
O Enter number of days.
Total Shelf
Life
Number of days material
will keep in total
O Enter number of days
PeriodIndicator for
shell life
The period indicatorspecifies the unit of
measurement for a periodof time
O Enter number of days
Old Material Number
Plant Specific Old materialnumber
O Enter Old Material Number
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 535/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 535
On tab “Plant data/stor.2”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 536/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 536
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General plant parameters
Section header
Neg. stocksin plant
Negative stocks allowed in plant
O Check box as appropriate
Log.Handling
group
Logistics handling groupfor workload calculation
O Use pull down menu
Serial No.
profile
Serial number profile O Use pull down menu
Dist. Prof Distribution profile of
material in plant
O Use pull down menu
Profit center Profit center R Use pull down menu
Stockdetermin.
Group
The stock determinationgroup combined with the
Stock Determination Ruleat plant level create a key
for the stock determinationstrategy.
O Use pull down menu
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 537/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 537
n tab “Quality management”, enter information in the fields as specified in
the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 538/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 538
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General data Section header
Base Unit ofmeasure
Base unit of measure R defaults from Basic data View
Procurement
data
Section header
Inspection
type
The inspection type defines
how an inspection is performed. Several
inspection types can beassigned to an inspection lotorigin.
O
QM control
key
Control Key for Quality
Management in Procurement
O Use pull down menu
Enter.
On tab “Accounting 1”, enter information in the fields as specified in the
below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 539/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 539
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
General
Data
Section Heading
Base Unit of
Measure
Inventory UOM R Enter UOM or select from pull
down list
Defaults from
Basic Data.
ValuationCategory
Indicates whether stocksare valuated together orseparately
O
Current
Valuation
Section Heading
ValuationClass
Defines which group ofG/L accounts material isassigned
R Select from pull down menu tochange default value
Prom. stk val.
Class
Valuation Class for Project
Stock. Default value forthe valuation class for
valuated project stocks ofthe material.
R Use pull down menu
Price Control Defines whether material isvaluated with standard or
moving average price
R „V‟ – Moving Average Price Defaults infrom the
material type.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 540/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 540
Mov. Avg.Price
Moving average price ofthe material
C Enter price
Enter.
On tab “Costing 1” and tab “Costing 2”, Only views will be maintained, no
field will be populated as of now.
Not Applicable
On tab “Plant stock ”, information is displayed regarding the stocks of this
material in this plant: Automatic
Not Applicable
On tab “Stor. location stock”, information is displayed regarding the stocks
of this material in this storage location: Automatic
Not Applicable
Save to create the material using the “save” button or use the “Ctrl S” key combination.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 541/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 541
To extend a material to add an additional department view:
Access transaction by:
Via Menus (a) Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>Material
Master>Material > Create(General)
Via Transaction Code MM01
On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 542/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 542
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Key identifying material R Enter material number
IndustrySector
Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material
MaterialType
Group to which material isassigned.
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored for
this material
Copy From
Material:
Similar material from which th
systemobtains selected values
O Leave blank.
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
Press Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 543/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 543
On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes for the
screen(s) to be added.
Enter.
On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 544/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 544
Note that the fields displayed will depend upon the views selected.
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Organizati
onal Levels
Section Header
Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will
be active or select from pull
down menu
StorageLocation
Storage LocationIdentification key
O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or selectfrom pull down menu
Profiles Section Header
MRPProfile
MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that areindependent of the
Forecast
prof.
Forecast profile O Key that allows you to store
forecast parametersindependently of a materialmaster record.
Enter.
Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
this document on page 2).
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 545/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 545
To extend a material to another plant:
Access transaction by:
Via Menus (a) Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Create (General) > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Create (General)
(c) Logistics>Production>Master Data>MaterialMaster>Material > Create(General)
Via Transaction Code MM01
On screen “Create Material: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 546/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 546
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Key identifying material R Enter material number
IndustrySector
Specifies branch of industryto which material is assigned
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored forthis material
MaterialType
Group to which material isassigned.
O Leave blank. System willdefault in the value stored for
this material
Copy From
Material:
Similar material from which th
systemobtains selected values
O Leave blank.
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
Press Enter.
On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check at least one box other than the
basic data views.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 547/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 547
Enter.
On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels’, enter the plant number and other
information in the fields as specified in the below table:
Note that the fields displayed depends upon the screens selected.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 548/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 548
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Organizati
onal Levels
Section Header
Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will be active or select from pulldown menu
StorageLocation
Storage LocationIdentification key
O Enter Storage Location wherematerial will reside or selectfrom pull down menu
Profiles Section HeaderMRP
Profile
MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to store
MRP parameters that areindependent of the
Forecast prof.
Forecast profile O Key that allows you to storeforecast parameters
independently of a materialmaster record.
Enter.
Foll ow the procedural steps outl ined above for the screens selected (See table of contents for
th is document on above pages).
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 549/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 549
16. MM-MM02-Material-Change
Overview
A request to immediately change one or more fields in the material master views
Business Process Description Overview
Fields within the material master can be added and maintained after the initial creation process. Somefields cannot be changed after creation (i.e. material description) and some should not be changed without
proper precautions.
To change a material master record, the data for the view the user wants to change must already bemaintained.
Note that to add a view or extend a material to a new plant, the “Create Material” transaction isused rather than the “Change Material” transaction.
Input-Required Fields Field Value/Comments Material Material Number
Output - Results Comments
Material Master View (s) changed Chosen view in Material Master will change
Tips and Tricks
When selecting view for change, it is possible to avoid time and effort, by clicking on right mouse
button and use “Select All” rather than indicating each view button
When changing material master views you can proceed in a linear fashion between views by
pressing “Enter” key or pressing Check mark key. By pressing the view tabs you can control
progression through views as per your preference.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 550/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 550
The Views that you use will drive the “Organizational level” pop-up window and its fields. To set
user defaults for views and organizational levels follow these steps:
Views:
Menus: Defaults >> Views
Select those views to be checked on by default when generating a new material. Select ‘View
selection only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to be by-passed unless selected.
Organizational levels:
Menus: Defaults >> organizational levels
Enter those organizational levels to be defaulted when generating a new material. Select ‘Org.levels/profiles only on request’ when the select view pop-up is to be by-passed unless selected.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 551/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 551
Procedural Steps
Access ‘Change Material’ by:
Via Menus (a) Logistics>Material Management>Materialmaster>Material>Change > Immediately
(b) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Prod. resources/tools
> Prod. resources/tools > Material > Change>Immediately(c) Logistics>Sales and Distribution>Master
Data>Products>Material >Trading Goods > Change(d) Logistics>Logistics Execution >Master
Data>Material>Material > Change> Immediately
(e) Logistics>Customer Service> Technical Objects>Material>Change
(f) Logistics>Quality Management Test EquipmentManagement> Test Equipment > Material >Change
(g) Logistics>Project Systems> Basic data> Materialmaster>Material>Change
Via Transaction Code MM02
On screen ‘Change Material: Initial screen’: enter information in table below:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 552/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 552
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Material number R Enter the material number ifknown or search via matchcode
Change Number
Unique number used toidentify a change master
record
O Enter number if required
Enter.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 553/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 553
On pop up screen ‘Select View(s)’, check the appropriate boxes for the
screens desired.
Note: The material type controls which views are displayed. Therefore, specif ic materi al types
wil l not contain certain views.
Press Enter.On pop up screen ‘Organizational Levels ”: enter information in table below:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 554/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 554
Note: The information required wil l depend upon whi ch views were selected.
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Organizati
onal Levels
Section Header
Plant Plant identification key R Enter Plant where material will
be active or select from pulldown menu
Storage
Location
Storage Location
Identification key
O Enter Storage Location where
material will reside or selectfrom pull down menu
Sales org. Sales Organization O Required if sales view wasselected
Distrchannel
Distribution Channel O Required if sales view wasselected
Whsenumber
Warehouse number N/A Required if warehousemanagement view selected
Storagetype
Storage type N/A Required if warehousemanagement view selected
Profiles Section Header
MRPProfile
MRP Parameters O Key that you can use to storeMRP parameters that are
independent of the
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 555/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 555
Forecast prof.
Forecast profile N/A Key that allows you to storeforecast parameters
independently of a materialmaster record.
Enter.
On subsequent screens, make the necessary changes. For example Change
the Purchasing Group in Purchasing Tab
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 556/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 556
Save the revised material master using the “Save” button or use “Ctrl S”.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 557/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 557
17. MM-MM03-Material-Display
Overview
Need to view current material master data for one material.
Business Process Procedure Overview
A material master record can be displayed so that a user has access to see detailed information without
having the authority to change it.
Input – Required Fields Field Value/Comments Material Material number
View At least one view (for example, Basic Data, Sales, Accounting,MRP, etc.) must be selected
Output - Results Comments Information about the material Material displayed
Tips and Tricks
If the same values are used frequently, it will be faster to access the material master data by
setting up defaults. Default values can be set up for Industry Sector, Views and Organizational
levels. These defaults are set from the MM03 initial screen, from the menu selection
“Defaults”.
If all views should be displayed, it is faster to clicking on right mouse button and use “Select All”(or press the “Select All” icon) rather than clicking on each view button.
To display a material for a specific date, please use Display Material Master by Key Date,
transaction MM19. This transaction will show the fields associated with the material on the
entered, key date.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 558/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 558
Procedural Steps
Access transaction by:
a) Via Menus a) Logistics>Materials Management>Material
Master>Material>Display > Display current b) Logistics>Materials Management>Inventory
Management>Environment> information>Materialc) Logistics > Production > Master Data > Material Master >
Material > Display > Display current
d) Logistics > Plant Maintenance > Technical Objects >Material > Display
e) Logistics > Customer Service > Technical Objects > Material> Display
f) Logistics > Quality Management > Quality Planning >Logistics Master Data > Material > Display
g) Logistics > Project System > Basic Data > Master Data >
Material > Display
Via Transaction Code MM03
On screen “Display Material (Initial Screen)”, enter information in the fields
as specified in the table below:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 559/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 559
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Material number R Material known or viamatchcode
On the pop-up screen “Select View(s)”: enter information in table below:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 560/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 560
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
SelectView
View or views that containthe information to bedisplayed
R Select the appropriate view(s)
On the pop-up screen “Organizational Levels”, enter the appropriate
information in table below (the system will determine which organizational
levels are appropriate for the views that have been selected):
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Plant Plant number where materialis located
C Plant number known or viamatchcode search
Storage
Location
Location where material is
stored
C Enter storage location if known If you are
looking forstorage locationspecificinformation,
then you will be required to
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 561/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 561
enter thestorage
location.
Valuation
Type
How material is valued C Leave blank - will default from
Materials Master
This field is
only used whena material issplit valued.
Sales org. The organizational unit that isresponsible for selling thematerial
C Enter the appropriate salesorg., if you want to see theSales information
Distr.channel
The way in which thematerial reaches the customer
C Enter the appropriateDistribution channel if you
want to see the Salesinformation.
Enter Press enter or click on thecheck mark
R Will display view you havechosen or Basic data if you
chose more than one view. It isthen possible to tab to thespecific view of current
interest.
Note: On the above table, in column “R/O/C”; “R” = required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional)
On the screen “Display Material <material number you entered> (Material
type of the material you entered); you may do the following:
Select the tab associated with the view of information you wish to check. Scroll back and forward arrows
appear in the upper right-hand corner of the table view. Alternately, a list of views, which exist for thematerial, can be seen by pressing on right most arrow. You can navigate to appropriate view via selectingfrom this list.
If you wish to see the defined alternate units of measure, Material descriptions in other languages, Basic
data text, Inspection Text, or Internal Comments that exist for the material, press the “Additional Data”
button. Press the button “Main data” to return to the views.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 562/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 562
If you wish to review the changes that have been made to this material, select from the menu,
Environment > Display Changes. Double-click on the appropriate date, and you will know who changed
which fields on what date and at what time, for this material.
If you wish to check a different material, you can either press the button “Other Material” , or green
arrow back to the initial screen.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 563/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 563
18. MM-MM04-Material-Display Changes
Overview
Requirement to view changes made to a material master record
Business Process Procedure Overview
All changes made to fields in the material master record can be viewed using this transaction. It displaysthe old field entry, the new field entry. It also shows who made the change and the date the change wasmade.
Input – Required Fields Field Value/Comments
Material Material number
Output - Results Comments
Material Master changes display All changes made to the original Material master record
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 564/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 564
Procedural Steps
Access transaction by:
Via Menus Logistics>Materials Management>Material Master>Material>Display Changes
Via Transaction Code MM04
On screen “Display Changes: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields
as specified in the table below:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 565/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 565
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Alphanumeric key uniquelyidentifying the material.
R Material number known or viamatchcode search
Change no. Number used to uniquelyidentify a change masterrecord.
O Change number known or viamatchcode search
Plant An organizational unit whereeither materials are producedand/or stored or goods orservices are provided
O Plant known or via drop downmenu
ValuationType
Uniquely identifies separatelyvaluated stocks of a material.
O Type value if known else selectvia drop down menu
Sales Orgn. An organizational unitresponsible for the sale of
certain products or services.The responsibility of a salesorganization may includelegal liability for products andcustomer claims.
O Type value if known else selectvia drop down menu
Distribution Channel
The way in which products orservices reach the customer.
Typical examples ofdistribution channels are
wholesale, retail, or directsales.
O Type value if known else selectvia drop down menu
Warehouse
no.
Number that identifies a
complex, physical warehousestructure within theWarehouse Managementsystem
O Type value if known else select
via drop down menu
StorageType
The storage type is asubdivision of a complex,
physical warehouse.
O Type value if known else selectvia drop down menu
Changed by Name of person who changed
object
O Type the user id to search changes
made by that user.
From
changeddate
Date restriction for change
documents. The system onlydisplays changes which were
made as from this date.
O Type date else select via drop
down menu
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 566/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 566
(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional)
Click on the button.
On screen “Display Changes: Material overview”, view the field changes
made to the Material master record. Either double clicks or select and see
details via clicking “Choose” button.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 567/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 567
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 568/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 568
19. MM-MM50-Material-List Extendable Material
Overview
Need to extend existing material master records to include additional departmental views.
Business Process Procedure Overview
Material master records are an accumulation of data from numerous departments. New views of a
material are added as necessary and it is necessary to determine which views need to be added to amaterial. This procedure lists all of the views that have not been created for a material.
This procedure can also be used to determine to which plants a material has been extended.
Input – Required Fields Field Value/Comments Selection limit criteria Necessary to prevent excessively large output lists
Output - Results Comments Create missing views of the materialmaster record
Views created as per the requirement
Tips and Tricks
To avoid excessive run times and huge output lists, it is imperative to restrict the search limits on theinitial screen. If no entries are made the system will list all materials in all plants.
By entering a material number, it is possible to determine the plants to which a material has beenextended. Additional plants need to be added using the MM01 transaction.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 569/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 569
Procedural Steps
Access transaction by:
Via Menus Logistics -> Materials management -> Material master -> Other -> Extend matl view(s)
Via Transaction Code MM50
On screen “Extend Material View(s): Initial Screen”, enter information in the
fields as specified in the table below to limit the material search:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 570/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 570
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Selection
Criteria
Section header
Maintenanc
e status
Identifier for the user
department responsible formaintaining a view of thematerial master record
O Use pull down menu to select.
Created on Date that the material masterrecord was created
O Use pull down menu to select.
Plant Organizational unitresponsible for the producingmaterials or providing goodsor services
O Use pull down menu to select.
Salesorganizatio
n
Organizational unitresponsible for the sales of
specific products or services
O Use pull down menu to select.
Distributio
n channel
Identifier for the method in
which a product reachescustomers.
O Use pull down menu to select.
Warehousenumber
Number of the warehouse O Use pull down menu to select.
Material Number of the material O Use pull down menu to select.
Materialtype
Code that assigns a materialto a group of materials
O Use pull down menu to select.
Industrysector
Identifier for the industry thatthe material is assigned
O Use pull down menu to select.
Selection
logic
Section header
ANDoperation
Flag that indicates if thesystem should select views
that satisfy all of the selection parameters
R Select AND or OR
ORoperation
Flag that indicates if thesystem should select views
that satisfy one of theselection parameters
O
Execute the selection process by clicking on the Execute button.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 571/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 571
On screen “Extend Material View(s): Overview”, select from the list of views
to be processed for each material by selecting the boxes in the left column.
Select from the following buttons to process the material master recordviews:
Maintain materials [Shift+F1]: Allows the user to maintain the selected views
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 572/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 572
Delete status [Shift+F2]: Allows the user to delete the selected open status(es)
Select all [Shift+F8]: Selects all of the material views listed
Select all in block [Shift+F7]: Selects the current block of material views
Deselect all [Shift+F5}: Deselects all selected material views
Deselect block [Shift+F6]: Deselects the current block of selected material views
Reference/organization [F9]: Allows the user to create material views with
reference to existing material master records
Once the required material views have been selected, click on the Maintain
materials button to go to the corresponding view(s) in the material
master(s).
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 573/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 573
Enter the information necessary to complete the view and save each
material after processing.
Repeat as necessary for additional materials.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 574/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 574
2. Service Master
1. MM-AC03-Service-Create Change Display
Overview
A service master record provides a unique description of services that are procured by BSNL.
Business Process Description Overview This document describes the procedure for creating service master records via list processing. This
process enables the user to quickly create a large number of service master records with their most
important data in the system, referencing any already existing master records if desired. A service is
identified by the number of this master record. The service master record serves as a source of default
data provided by the system during the creation of service specifications.
Input – Required Fields Field Value/Comments Service CategoryService short text
Base Unit of Measure
Key used to differentiate services by usageDescription which identifies service
Services have base units of measure of their own: service unit and blanket
Output - Results Comments Service Master Record Number Internal number range
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 575/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 575
Tips and Tricks
To create a new service master record, click on the create icon (blank pc. of paper).
To edit an existing service master record, click on the change icon (pencil with eye glasses)
To copy an existing master record, click on the copy as icon (two yellow pcs. of paper)
To show/ hide service list overview, click icon
To display other service codes (already created) select, “other services” button and enter
the service code you want to display:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 576/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 576
Procedural Steps
Access transaction by:
Via Menus a) Information Systems> Logistics> Purchasing>
Material/service> Service> Service Master
b) Logistics> Production> KANBAN> Environment> Purchasing>
Outline Agreement> Reporting> Purchasing Information
System> Environment> Master data> Service
c) Logistics> Customer Service>Service
Agreements>Maintenance Task Lists> Environment>ServiceMaster> Service> Service Master
d) Logistics> Customer Service> Service Processing>Environment> Service Master> Service> Service Master
e) Logistics> Plant Maintenance>Planned
Maintenance>Maintenance Task Lists> Environment>Service
Master>Service> Service Master
f) Logistics>Materials Management>ServiceMaster>Service>Service Master
Via Transaction Code AC03
On screen “Display Service #############”, click the New Service button or
use the menu path EDIT >NEW to access the Create Service Master Record
Screen:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 577/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 577
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 578/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 578
On screen “Create Service Master Record”, enter the information in the
fields as specified in the table below:
Field Name Description R/O/C
User Action and Values Comments
ActivityNumber
Key which uniquely defines a
service
R External numbering will be used.
ServiceShort Text
40 char. Enter description ofservice
R Enter a short description of service
ServiceCategory
Key identifying service by
usage
R Enter service category
Short tx.Change
allowed
Check indicates that changesto text are allowed
O
Base Unitof Measure
Service Unit or Blanket R
Deletion
Flag
Indicator that allows deletion o
master record
O
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 579/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 579
Formula Formula used for quantities ifdefined
O
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
Click on “Basic Data” button to enter basic data information in the fields as
specified in the table below:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
MaterialGroup
Key to group several serviceswith the same attributes
O If all new records the user arecreating have the same material
group, enter value here.
Formula Formula used for quantities if
Defined
O
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
Press button “Time mgmt.” Enter the information in the fields as listed in the
table below.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 580/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 580
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Hier.ServiceNo.
A code identifying a group oflower level services
O Enter the code NotApplicable
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Condition
Press button “Internal Work”. Enter the information in the fields as listed in
the table below.
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Translation
Factor for translating servicerates
O Enter the conversion rate NotApplicable
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Condition
Save the master record by clicking on the yellow floppy disk icon, or crtl+S
1.2.1. Message will be displayed confirming that the data records have been created
Exit Create Service Master processing. Click on yellow up-facing arrow icon,
or Shift+F3
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 581/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 581
2.0. Use the same transaction code to change or display the service master record.
2. MM-AC06-Service Master-List Display
Overview
Requirement for information and the status of service master records
Business Process Description Overview
This document describes the procedure for displaying service master records via list processing
Input – Required Fields Field Value/Comments Service Number Can be found using “possible entries” facility to choose relevant
master recordService Category Can be found using “possible entries” facility to choose relevant
master record
Output - Results Comments List Display of Service MasterRecords
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 582/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 582
Procedural Steps
Access transaction by:
Via Menus a) Logistics>Materials Management>Service
Master>Service>Service List
b) Logistics> Plant Maintenance> Maintenance Processing>
Environment> Service Master> Service> Service List
c) Logistics> Plant Maintenance> Planned Maintenance>
Maintenance Task Lists> Environment> Service Master>
Service> Service List
d) Logistics> Customer Service> Service Agreements>
Maintenance Task Lists> Environment> Service Master>
Service> Service List
e) Logistics> Customer Service> Service Processing>
Environment> Service Master> Service> Service List
f) Information Systems> General Report Selection> MaterialsManagement> Service Master> List Display: Service Master
Via Transaction Code AC06
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 583/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 583
On screen “List Display: Service Master: Selection of Services”: enter the user
desired selection criteria by choosing fields below:
Field Name Description R/O/
C
User Action and Values Comments
ActivityNumber
Key that uniquely defines a
service
O Activity number known or via
matchcode selection to narrowsearch
Leaving
blank willreturn all
recordswith
criteria
ServiceCategory
Key used to differentiateservices by usage
O Service category known or viamatchcode selection to narrowsearch
Service Description of service O Enter description to narrow records
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 584/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 584
short text
MaterialGroup
Key to group several serviceswith the same attributes
O Material group known or via matchcoselection to narrow search
Division Determines sales area and busi
areas
O Division known or via matchcode sele
tonarrow search
Hier.Service no.
Key that identifies a higher-levservice
O Enter higher-level service to narrow se
ServiceType
Service Type O Enter service type to narrow search
Edition Version of service type O Enter Edition to narrow records
SSC Item External number assigned to thi
service from standard service c
O Enter SSC item to narrow search
Wage Type Key which specifies wage type O Enter wage type or via matchcode sele
to narrow search
Authorization Group
Group which authorizes users tcertain access
O Enter authorization group to narrow se
Created On Date created O Select date
Created By User O Select user
ChangedOn
Date changed O Select date
ChangedBy
User O Select user
Once selections are made, choose the
execute button (PROGRAM>EXECUto retrieve list of services which met
service selection criteria
R = Required, O = Optional, C = Conditional
On screen “List Display: Service Master: List of Services”: a list of services
which
met selection criteria from step 1.2 are shown:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 585/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 585
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 586/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 586
Double click on service numbers the user want to individually display
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 587/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 587
Click “Details”
Selected Service is displayed
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 588/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 588
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 589/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 589
3. MM-ML10-Model Service Specifications-Create
Overview
The need for service specifications that can be used in purchasing documents for planned procurements activities that include services.
Business Process Description Overview
This document describes the procedure for creating a model service specification. Model service
specifications (model specs) are specifications that can be used time and time again. You can use thespecifications for a certain group of services as a template if you procure these services repeatedly in the
future
Input Required Fields Field Value/Comments
Model Service Specification
Name/Number
Enter a Model Service Specification name or number
Output - Results Comments
Completed Model Service
Specification
Can be used as template for repeated use
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 590/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 590
Procedural Steps
Access transaction by:
Via Menus Logistics>Materials Management>Service Master>Model
Service Specification>Create
Via Transaction Code ML10
On screen “Create Model Services Specifications”, enter the information in
the fields as specified in the table below:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 591/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 591
Field Name Description R/O/C
User Action and Values Comments
ModelService
Specs.
Number of a set of modelservice specifications
R Enter a key (name or number forexample) for the new service
model.
ServiceCategory
Key used todifferentiate betweenservices according totheir usage. Theservice category
defines certainattributes of the serviceand has a control
function.
O Enter the appropriate servicecategory for the new model.
Matchcode(F4) searchhelpavailable.
(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional)
Click on the Enter button.
On screen “Create Model Services Specifications”, enter the information in
the fields as specified in the table below:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 592/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 592
Field Name Description R/O/C
User Action and Values Comments
Blockingindicator
Indicator: blocks the use ofthe specification.
O Select if desired. Default is off.
Configuration/Serviceselection
Indicator: configurationoccurs at the time of serviceselection.
O Select if desired. Default is off.
Description Enter description of modelservice spec
R Enter description.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 593/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 593
Search term Search key O Enter search term
Currency Currency Key O Enter currency
MaterialGroup
Key which groups similarservices
O Please refer the attached annexure
Defaultdata forPurchasingRequisition
Purchasing Org
Fixed vendor
Contract
O Enter default data
Check Data Authorization Group
Purchasing Status
Valid from
O Enter check data
Administrative data
Created On
Created By
Changed On Changed By
C Display only, created by the systemat the time of creation and
subsequent changes to the spec.
The “I” iconwill call up
the detailedinformation
pop-up.
(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional)
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 594/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 594
Once all appropriate entries have been made, click on the Services button to
maintain the service specifications.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 595/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 595
If Hierarchy needs to be maintained, Click on New Sub Group button. Here,
hierarchy up to 4 levels can be maintained. Create the levels as follows;
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 596/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 596
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Outlinelevel
Key for the outline(hierarchy) level.
R Give a number as per whichhierarchy will be maintained.
Short text Short description of theservice (activity or work).
R Short description of respectiveHierarchy level
Long Text Long description of theservice (activity or work).
O Long description of respectiveHierarchy level
(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional)
In Service Specification Outline, double click on the respective level at whichthe service information needs to be maintained. It will take you to
screen”Model Service Specifications Maintain” for that level. Under the
respective level enter the information in the fields as specified in the table
below:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 597/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 597
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
ServiceNo
Service Number from ServiceMaster Record
O Enter Service Number for codifiedservices.
Don‟t give service no. if theservice to be maintained here isuncodified.
Matchcode(F4) searchhelp is
available.
Short Text Description of Service C For codified services, will defaultfrom Service Master record forService Number entered.
If a particular service is a one-timeservice and no service master
record in maintained, then a freetext description should be entered
here.
Quantity Quantity of Service R Enter Quantity for service.
U Unit R Enter unit of measure.
This will default from the Servicemaster record if a Service Number
is entered.
Matchcode(F4) search
help isavailable.
(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional)
Once all the entries have been made, save the Model Service Specification
by clicking on the Save button
The system will display a message “Model Specification XXXXXXX saved”,
with XXXXXXXX = to the name or number entered on the initial creation
screen.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 598/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 598
4. MM-ML11-Model Service Specification-Change
Overview
Need to change current Model Service Specification.
Business Process Procedure Overview
Fields within the Model Service Specification record can be added and maintained after the initialcreation process.
Input – Required Fields Field Value/Comments Model Service Specification Model Service Specification number
Output - Results Comments Information changed as per
requirement about the Model ServiceSpecification
Model Service Specification changed
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 599/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 599
Procedural Steps
Access transaction by:
b) Via Menus h) Logistics>Materials Management>Service Master>Model
Service Specification>Change
Via Transaction Code ML11
On screen “Display Model Service specification”, enter information in thefields as specified in the table below:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Model
Service
Specs.
Number of a set of model
service specifications
R Model Service Specification
known or via matchcode
(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional)
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 600/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 600
Enter
It will take to “Change Model Service Specification” screen. Information about Service category, Blocking
indicator, Configuration/Service selection, Description, Search term, Currency, Material Group, Default
data for Purchasing Requisition and Check Data can be changed. Please note, Administrative data can not
be changed as it is maintained by system.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 601/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 601
Click “Services” button. It will take to “Model Service Specification display” screen.
To see the Hierarchy levels maintained under this Model Service specification, In header, go to “Outline”.
Click “Outline On/ Off”
It will show “service specs outline”.
Outline On/Off
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 602/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 602
Click on any hierarchy level maintained (if any) to see the details of services maintained under respective
hierarchy level and make changes accordingly.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 603/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 603
5. MM-ML12-Model Service Specification-Display
Overview
Need to view current Model Service Specification.
Business Process Procedure Overview
A Model Service Specification record can be displayed so that a user has access to see detailedinformation without having the authority to change it.
Input – Required Fields Field Value/Comments Model Service Specification Model Service Specification number
Output - Results Comments Information about the Model Service
Specification
Model Service Specification displayed
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 604/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 604
Procedural Steps
Access transaction by:
c) Via Menus i) Logistics>Materials Management>Service Master>Model
Service Specification>Display
Via Transaction Code ML12
On screen “Display Model Service specification”, enter information in the
fields as specified in the table below:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Model
ServiceSpecs.
Number of a set of model
service specifications
R Model Service Specification
known or via matchcode
(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional)
Enter
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 605/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 605
It will take to “Display Model Service Specification” screen. Information about Service category, Blocking
indicator, Configuration/Service selection, Description, Search term, Currency, Material Group, Default
data for Purchasing Requisition, Check Data and Administrative data will be displayed.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 606/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 606
Click “Services” button. It will take to “Model Service Specification display” screen.
To display the Hierarchy levels maintained under this Model Service specification, in header, go to
“Outline”. Click “Outline On/ Off”
It will display “service specs outline”.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 607/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 607
Click on any hierarchy level maintained (if any) to see the details of services maintained under respective
hierarchy level.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 608/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 608
3. Vendor Master
1. MM-XK01-Vendor-Create (centrally)
Overview
A new vendor needs to be created.
Business Process Description Overview
All vendor data is stored in the vendor master record and controls how transaction data is posted to avendor.
Vendor master data is used not only by the accounting department but also by the materials
management department. When setting up the master records, there is the option to create the
accounting and materials management sections separately, each in its own application area, or together
by creating the vendor master “centrally”.
A vendor master record includes data such as:
· vendor name, address, language, and phone numbers
· tax numbers
· bank data
· account control data, such as the G/L reconciliation account for the vendor account
· payment methods and terms of payment as agreed with the vendor
· purchasing data
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 609/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 609
Input – Required Fields Comments Vendor Name of vendor
Company Code Company code in which the vendor is being set up
Purchasing Organization Purchasing organization that the vendor is associated withAccount Group Account Group of vendorReference Vendor An existing vendor that the new vendor can be copied from
Output - Results Comments All vendor information for NewVendor
Tips and Tricks
This process describes creating the vendor master centrally (accounting views and the purchasingviews of the vendor master record). To create just the purchasing views, see the BPP for transactionMK01.
By creating/storing vendor master records centrally, permits common access and allows the enteringof data only once and to avoid contradictory/redundant data. If a vendor's address has changed, forexample, the user needs to enter the change only once, and both the accounting department and the
purchasing department will have access to the most current data.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 610/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 610
Procedural Steps
Access transaction by:
Via Menus Logistics > Materials management > Purchasing > Master data >Vendor> Central > Create
Via Transaction Code XK01
On screen “Create Vendor: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C
User Action and Values Comments
Vendor If using external number assignment,
enter the vendor's account number.
If using internal number assignment,
the system assigns a number whensaving the master data.
O
Companycode
the company code ID R
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 611/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 611
Account
group
A classifying feature within the
vendor master record whichdetermines if the vendor account
number will be assigned internally or
externally and which fields are
proposed for input
R Enter account classifyingnumber
Reference
Vendor The vendor’s account number that is
being used as a reference as an
alternative way in which to create a
vendor account
O Note: Vendor specific dataof the referenced vendor
such as address is not
carried over. The datafrom the referenced
vendor is used for defaultvalues and it is suggested
that all screens bereviewed before savingany data
CompanyCode
The company code assigned with the
reference vendor
O
PurchasingOrganization
The purchasing associated with the
referenced vendor
C Please refer the attachedannexure
(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional)
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 612/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 612
Click on the Enter button.
On screen “Create Vendor: Address Screen”, enter information in the fields
as specified in the table below:
FieldName
Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Name Vendor or company name R Enter selected vendor name
Searchterm
Short name which is usedto set up a matchcode
R Enter search term such asabbreviated address orinitials
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 613/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 613
Street street address O
City city O
Postalcode orPO boxPCode
zip code O
Country two digit country identifier R
Region(state)
two letter stateabbreviation
O
Language one letter language code O
Telephone Telephone number O Other communication typescan also be maintained
Fax Fax number O
Standardcomm line
Other line forcommunication
O
Comments
Use this block for optionalcomments or notes
O
(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional)
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 614/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 614
Click on the Enter button.
On screen “Create Vendor: Control”, enter information in the optional fields
as applicable in the table below:
FieldName
Description R/O/C
User Action andValues
Comments
Customer If the vendor is also a customer, usethis field to link the two recordstogether for line item display andtransaction processing
O
Group Key If the vendor belongs to a group, can
assign a group key here. If creating amatchcode using this group key, groupevaluations are possible.
O
Industrykey
Assigned industry key used to identifyindustry data
O Enter as required
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 615/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 615
(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional)
Click on the Enter button.
On screen “Create Vendor: Payment Transactions”, enter the vendor’s
banking information if applicable (e.g. for wire transfers):
FieldName
Description R/O/C
User Action andValues
Comments
Country Bank country key O
Bank Key Key under which bank data in therespective country is stored
O
AccountHolder
Another name that the paymentprogram can use if the name of theaccount holder is not the same as thename of the vendor
O
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 616/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 616
Bank
Account
The number at the bank under which
the account is managed
O
AlternativePayee
The vendor’s account number O This field is used onlyif the payment is tobe made directly tothe vendor and not tothe vendor’s bank
(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional)
Click on the Enter button.
On screen “Create Vendor: Accounting Information Accounting”, enter
information in the fields as specified in the below table:
Field Name Description R/O/C
User Action and Values Comments
Reconciliationaccount
account which is updated parallel tothe sub-ledger account for normalpostings
R
Sort key This field determines how theallocation field is populated duringdocument entry. When displayingline items, the line items are sortedinitially by the allocation field.
O
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 617/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 617
Minority
Indicator
Minority Indicator O
InterestIndicator
Interest Indicator O
InterestFrequency
Interest Frequency O
(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional)
Click on the Enter button.
On screen “Create Vendor: Payment Transactions Accounting”, enter
information in the optional fields as applicable:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 618/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 618
Field Name
Description R/O/C
User Action and Values Comments
PaymentTerms
Key for defining payment termscomposed of cash discountpercentages and payment periods
O
Tolerance group
Settings for vendor-specificparameters in Logistics InvoiceVerification.
O
CheckDoubleInvoice
Indicator which means that incominginvoices and credit memos arechecked for double entries at the timeof entry.
O
PaymentMethods
different methods by which the vendorcan be paid using the automaticpayment program
O
PaymentBlock
Block key used to block an open itemor an account for paymenttransactions.
O
AlternatePayee
The account number of the vendorwith whom automatic paymenttransactions are to be carried out.
O
House
Bank
The key for the house bank is used if
the customer/vendor is always to bepaid by the same house bank. Thebank selection of the paymentprogram is cancelled with this entry.
O
PaymentMethodSuppliment
Characteristic in an open item for thegrouping of payments.
O
(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional)
Click on the Enter button.
On screen “Create Vendor: Correspondence Accounting:” enter information
in the fields as specified in the table below.
Leave this screen blank
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 619/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 619
Click on the Enter button.
On screen “Create Vendor: Correspondence Accounting:, enter information
in the fields as specified in the table below.
With-holding tax box not checked
Field
Name
Description R/O/
C
User Action and Values Comments
Withholdi
ng Tax
Country
In some countries, an additional country
is needed for calculating or reporting
withholding tax. The calculation candepend on the payee's country
O
Indicatorforwithholdin
g tax type
This indicator is used to classify thedifferent types of withholding tax.
O
Withholdi
ng taxcode
One or more "withholding tax codes" are
assigned to each withholding tax type.
O
Liable towithholding tax
If you set this indicator, you tell thesystem that the vendor is subject towithholding tax for this withholding tax
type.
O
Type ofrecipient
It is used to group vendors togetheraccording to particular characteristicssuch as occupations that may be subject to
the same withholding tax type
O
Withholdin
identificatio
number
It is used to group vendors together
according to particular characteristicssuch as occupations that may be subject tothe same withholding tax type
O
Exemption
certificate n
Numbered assigned by the relevant
authorities for exemption fromwithholding tax.
O
Exemption r Rate of exemption from withholding tax. O
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 620/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 620
Reason forexemption
Indicator used to classify different typesof exemption from liability to a particular
withholding tax.
O
Date onwhich
exemption begins
Date from which withholding tax
exemption applies.
O
Date onwhich
exemptionends
Date up to which withholding tax
exemption applies.
O
(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional)
Click on the Enter button.
On screen Create Vendor: Purchasing Data, Enter information in the fields as
specified in the below table:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 621/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 621
FieldName
Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
OrderCurrency
Order Currency R Enter Currency Code fortransactions with this vendor
Incoterms Incoterms O Select code and enter valuein second box (FOB - city)
Schema
group,vendor
Schema group, vendor O Enter Schema code
GR-basedinv. Verif
Goods receipt basedinvoice
Verification flag
O Click on if applicable
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 622/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 622
(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional)
Click on the Enter button.
On screen “Create Vendor: Partner Functions”, enter information in the
fields as specified in the below table:
Leave this screen blank
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 623/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 623
When all information has been entered, the system will prompt the user to
save the information. Select the ‘Yes’ option. Click on the Enter button.
The system will create and post vendor number in the message box at
bottom of screen.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 624/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 624
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 625/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 625
2. MM-XK02-Vendor-Change (centrally)
Overview
Requirement to change vendor material master document
Business Process Description Overview
Vendor master data is the data required conducting business relationships with your vendors. It includesaddress data and terms of payment, for example. It also controls how business transactions are posted to
a vendor account and how the posted data is processed.
Input - Required Fields Field Value / Comments
Vendor
Company code
Processing Options Select at least one screen from among the general data (address,
control, payment transactions) or company code screens(accounting info., payment transactions, correspondence,withholding tax)
Output - Results Comments
Tips and Tricks
Use the mouse right click on any field and it a drop down display will appear with one of the
selections to take advantage of is possible entries. By using this function you can get information
on the types of data requirement for each field.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 626/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 626
Procedural Steps
Access transaction by:
Via Menus Logistics > Materials management > Purchasing > Master data >
Vendor > Central > Change
Via Transaction Code XK02
On screen “Change Vendor: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the table below
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Vendor enter the vendor‟s account
number
R
Companycode
the company code ID of thevendor
R
Purch.
Organization
Purchase Organization R
(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional)
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 627/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 627
Select the appropriate combination of general data or company code data or
purchasing organization data processing options for screens to change.
NOTE: The menu path Edit Select all selects all the field groups listed
under General Data, Company Code Data and Purchasing Organization Data.
Click on the Enter button.
Use the left (F7) or right (F8) arrow buttons at the top left of the screen to
navigate between the different general and company code data screens.
Enter the necessary changes on the “Change Vendor: Address” screen. Click
on the Enter button to go to the next screen.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 628/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 628
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 629/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 629
Enter the necessary changes on the “Change Vendor: Control Data” screen”.
Click on the Enter button to go to the next screen.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 630/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 630
Enter the necessary changes on the “Change Vendor: Payment Transactions”
screen. Click on the Enter button to go to the next screen.
Enter the necessary changes on the “Change Vendor: Accounting Info.”
screen”. Click on the Enter button to go to the next screen.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 631/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 631
Enter the necessary changes on the “Change Vendor: Payment Transactions”
screen”. Click on the Enter button to go to the next screen.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 632/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 632
Enter the necessary changes on the “Change Vendor: Withholding Tax
screen”. Click on the Enter button to go to the next screen.
Enter the necessary changes on the “Change Vendor: Purchasing Data”
screen”. Click on the Enter button to go to the next screen.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 633/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 633
To save the changes that were made to the master record, use menu path
Vendor Save.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 634/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 634
3. MM-XK03-Vendor-Display (centrally)
Overview
To view the information related to vendor. You can display vendor using vendor number or using
drop down box select from vendor list.
Business Process Procedure OverviewThe display vendor (centrally) transaction allows the user to view the entire vendor master record. This
view includes general, company code, and purchasing data.
Input – Required Fields Field Value/Comments
Vendor Vendor numberCompany Code The smallest organizational unit for which a complete self-
contained set of accounts can be drawn up for purposes of
external reportingPurchasing Organization Organizational unit that negotiates the general conditions of
purchase for one or more plants
Output – Results Comments
Vendor displays A vendor‟s general data, company code data, and purchasing data
are accessible
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 635/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 635
Tips and Tricks
On the Display vendor screen by selecting a field and left mouse click will display a drop down box
that will prompt with possible entries for each field. Additionally on this screen you can search,
back up or go forward or exit the screen.
After entering required information in each selection press enter or select the green check icon to
advance to the next screen(s)
Procedural Steps
Access transaction by:
Via Menus Logistics>Materials Management>Purchasing>MasterData>Vendor>Central> Display
Via Transaction Code XK03
On screen “Display Vendor: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the table below:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 636/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 636
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Vendor Vendor number R Vendor number known or viamatchcode search
Companycode
The smallest organizationalunit for which a completeself-contained set ofaccounts can be drawn upfor purposes of external
reporting
O Company code known or viamatchcode searchsearch
Purchasing
organization
Organizational unit that
negotiates the generalconditions of purchase forone or more plants
O Purchasing organization known or
via matchcode search
Address Vendor address screen O Select if applicable
Control Control data screen O Select if applicable
Paymenttransactions
Banking information O Select if applicable
Accountinginfo
Accounting information O Select if applicable
Paymenttransactions
Payment information O Select if applicable
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 637/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 637
Correspondence
Dunning and vendorcontact information
O Select if applicable
Withholdingtax
C Will see tax withholding in messaon bottom of screen”
Purchasing
data
Purchasing information O Select if applicable
Partner
functions
Vendor partner structure O Select if applicable
(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional)
Click on the Enter button. The following views are available to gather
information from.
Display Vendor: Address
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 638/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 638
Display Vendor: Control
Display Vendor: Payment Transactions
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 639/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 639
Display Vendor: Accounting Information Accounting
Display Vendor: Payment Transactions Accounting
Display Vendor: Correspondence Accounting
Not activated
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 640/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 640
Display Vendor: Withholding Tax data
Not activated
Display Vendor: Purchasing Data
Display Vendor: Partner Functions
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 641/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 641
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 642/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 642
4. MM-XK04-Vendor-Changes (Centrally)
Overview
Requirement to view changes made to a vendor master record
Business Process Procedure Overview
All changes made to fields in the vendor master record can be viewed using this transaction. It displaysthe old field entry; the new field entry, as well as the table and field name. It also shows who made thechange and the date the change was made. Other information available includes deletions made to the
master record.
Input – Required Fields Field Value/Comments
Vendor Vendor number
Output - Results CommentsVendor account changes display All changes made to the original vendor master record
Tips and Tricks
If you select a field and with a right click on the mouse button you will see a drop down box appear
and one of the selections you can see choose suggest entries for each field on a document.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 643/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 643
After each section click on the Enter button to advance to the next screen.
Procedural Steps
Access transaction by:
Via Menus Logistics>Materials Management>Purchasing>MasterData>Vendor>Central> Changes
Via Transaction Code XK04
On screen “Vendor Account Changes: Initial Screen”, enter information in
the fields as specified in the table below:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 644/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 644
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comment
s
Vendor Vendor number R Vendor number known or via
matchcodesearch
Companycode
The smallest organizationalunit for which a completeself-contained set of accounts
can be drawn up for purposesof external reporting
O Company code known or via dropdown menu
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 645/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 645
Dunningarea
Represents an organizationalentity that is responsible for
dunning. The dunning areasrepresent a sub-structure of
the company codes
O Dunning area known or via dropdown menu
Purch.organization
Organizational unit thatnegotiates the generalconditions of purchase for
one or more plants
O Purchasing organization known orvia drop down menu
Vendor
sub-range
Sub-division of a vendor‟s
total product range accordingto various criteria
O Vendor sub-range known or via
drop down menu
Plant An organizational unit whereeither materials are producedand/or stored or goods or
services are provided
O Plant known or via drop downmenu
Period ofchange
From change date
Time
Changed by
O Enter dateEnter TimeEnter User
FieldSelection
Sensitive fields. Only
Comp. Code-specific
fields only
O Display only sensitive fields.Display only company code
specific fields.
(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional)
Click on the Enter button.
On screen “Vendor Changes: Changed Fields”, view the field changes made
to the vendor master record:
Overview: Overview displays changed fields in the vendor master record.
If the user enters the purchasing organization and/or the company code on
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 646/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 646
the initial screen, all purchasing and company code changes are visible. If
not, only the general data changes can be viewed.
Click on the All Changes button to view additional change information.
On screen “Vendor Changes: Overview”, view the detailed field change
information:
All Changes: The All Changed view displays the changed field, when it was
changed, as well as the ‘old’ and ‘new’ value for the field.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 647/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 647
Click on the Entries button to view additional change information.
On screen “Vendor Changes: Entries”, view the detailed entry change
information:
Entries: The Entries view displays the general views of the vendor
master. By double clicking on a view, the date and user who made the
change is visible.
Cli ck on the Deletions button to view additi onal change information.
On screen “Vendor Changes: Deletions”, view the detailed entry changeinformation:
Deletions: The Deletions view displays all deleted information from a
vendor master record such as bank details or partner function.
Not Available in this case
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 648/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 648
Click on the Field Names button to view additional change information.
On screen “Vendor Changes: Changed Fields”, view the detailed entry
change information:
Field Names: The Field Names view displays the table, field name, and
field description for a particular piece of changed data.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 649/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 649
5. MM-XK05-Vendor-Block (Centrally)
Overview
To block a vendor from posting and order processing.
Business Process Procedure Overview
You can block a vendor from posting, from order processing or from both. Blocking (and unblocking)can be set in either Financial Accounting or Materials Management. Within Accounts Payable, you can
block a vendor account from posting. (See BPP Block Vendor (Accounting)). You have to block a
vendor master record before you can mark it for deletion. You would also block a vendor that you useonly as an alternative payment recipient, so that nobody can post to it by mistake. Only block an account
if there are no more open items in the account. If an account is blocked, you cannot clear any open items.
Within Purchasing, you can block a vendor from order processing. (See BPP Block Vendor(Purchasing)).
You can block a vendor from both posting and order processing simultaneously from either AccountsPayable or Purchasing (See BPP Block Vendor (Centrally)).
You can cancel a vendor account block at any time. To do this, simply remove the relevant
indicator.
Input – Required Fields Field Value/Comments VendorCompany CodePurchasing Organization
Output - Results Comments Vendor is blocked from posting or
order processing.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 650/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 650
Procedural Steps
Access transaction by:
Via Menus Accounting Financial Accounting Accounts Payable
Master Records Maintain Centrally Block/Unblock
Logistics Materials Management Master Data Vendor
Central Block/Unblock
Via Transaction Code XK05
On screen “Block / Unblock Vendor: Initial Screen”, enter information in the
fields as specified in the table below:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 651/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 651
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Vendor Vendor number R Enter the Vendor number to be blocked.
Use dropdown menu
Company
Code
Company Code O If you enter a value in this field,
the next screen will allow you to block entries for this companycode or all company codes.However, if you leave this field
blank, you will only be able block
ALL company codes.
Use drop
down menu
Purchasing
Organization
Purchasing Organization
identifier
O Please refer the attached annexure. Use drop
down menu
(Note: On Above table in column “R/O/C”, “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional)
Click on the to continue.
On screen “Block / Unblock Vendor: Details Screen”, enter information in
the fields as specified in the table below:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 652/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 652
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
AllCompanycodes
Indicator specifying whether posting is allowed for thisvendor master record for all
company codes.
O Check the box if the vendormasters record is to be blockedfrom posting for all company
codes.
SelectedCo. Code Indicates the vendor is blocked for posting in thespecified company code.
O Check the box if the vendormaster record is to be blockedfrom posting for only specified
company code.
All
PurchasingOrganizatio
n
Indicator specifying whether
purchasing order processingis blocked for this vendor
master record for all purchasing organizations.
O Check the box if the vendor
master record is to be blockedfrom order processing for all
purchasing organizations.
Block for
quality
reasons
Reasons for blocking this
vendor master record from
purchasing order processing.
O Use the drop down menu for
predefined reasons.
(Note: On Above table in column “R/O/C”, “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional)
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 653/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 653
Click on the “Save” Icon to save all the changes
NOTE: A vendor account block may be cancelled at any time. To do this, simply remove the
relevant indicator/checks then click “Save” to save the changes
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 654/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 654
6. MM-XK06-Vendor-Flag for deletion
Overview
Archiving and Deleting Vendor Master Records
Business Process Procedure Overview
You can archive vendor account master records that you no longer need. Archiving data entails it being
extracted from the SAP database, deleted and placed in a file. You can then transfer this file to an archivesystem.
Vendor master records may not be archived immediately. For you to archive a vendor master
record, the following requirements must be met:
The account cannot contain any transaction figures in the system. Transaction figures from prior
years that have not been archived will prevent the system from deleting the account master
record.
The account must be marked for deletion in its master record.
You should block an account for posting before you mark it for deletion. The only effect this deletionindicator has is to cause a warning to be issued every time you subsequently try to post to this account.
Input – Required Fields Field Value/Comments VendorCompany CodePurchasing Organization
Output - Results Comments Vendor is flagged for deletion
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 655/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 655
Procedural Steps
Access transaction by:
Via Menus Accounting Financial Accounting Accounts Payable
Master Records Maintain Centrally Mark for deletion
Logistics Materials Management Master Data Vendor
Central Mark for deletion
Via Transaction Code XK06
On screen “Flag for deletion Vendor: Initial Screen”, enter information in the
fields as specified in the table below:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comment
s
Vendor Vendor number R Enter the Vendor number to be
flagged for deletion.
Use drop
down menuCompany
Code
Company Code O If you enter a value in this field,
the next screen will allow you totick deletion flag and deletion
block for this company code or allcompany codes. However, if you
Use drop
down menu
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 656/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 656
leave this field blank, you willonly be able to tick deletion flag
and deletion block for ALLcompany codes.
PurchasingOrganization
Purchasing Organization O Please refer the attached annexure Use dropdown menu
(Note: On Above table in column “R/O/C”, “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional)
Click on the to continue.
On screen “Block / Unblock Vendor: Details Screen”, enter information in
the fields as specified in the table below:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 657/701
MM COURSE: MASTER
Page | 657
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 658/701
MM COURSE 1
Page | 658
FieldName
Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Deletion
Flag
All areas Indicates that all data in this
master record is to be deleted.
O Check the box if the vendor
master record is to be flagged fordeletion for all company codes.
Selected
Co. Code
Indicates that the company
code data in this masterrecord is to be deleted.
O Check the box if the vendor
master record is to be flagged fordeletion for only specifiedcompany code.
All
PurchasingOrganization
Indicates whether or not
the vendor master record
is earmarked for deletion.
O Check the box if the vendor
master record is to be flagged fordeletion for all purchasingorganizations.
Deletion
Block
GeneralData
This indicator specifies thatthe general data in the master
record may not be deleted.
O Check the box if general data invendor master record is not to be
deleted.
Selectedco. code
includinggeneraldata
This indicator specifies thatthe company code-specific
data in the master record maynot be deleted.
O Check the box if company code-specific data in the master record
is not to be deleted.
(Note: On Above table in column “R/O/C”, “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional)
Click on the “Save” Icon to save all the changes.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 659/701
MM COURSE 1
Page | 659
7. MM-MKVZ-List Display
Overview
Requirement to view information of a vendor maintained for purchasing. You can display vendor using
vendor number or using drop down box select from vendor list.
Business Process Procedure Overview
The Purchasing List transaction allows the user to view the vendor master record maintained for purchasing. This view includes purchasing data.
Input – Required Fields Field Value/Comments
Vendor Vendor number
Purchasing Organization
Account Group
Organizational unit that negotiates the general conditions of
purchase for one or more plants
The account group is a classifying feature within vendor masterrecords
Output - Results Comments
Vendor displays A vendor‟s purchasing data are accessible
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 660/701
MM COURSE 1
Page | 660
Tips and Tricks
On the List of vendor screen by selecting a field and left mouse click will display a drop down box
that will prompt with possible entries for each field. Additionally on this screen you can search, back
up or go forward or exit the screen.
After entering required information in each selection press enter or select the green check icon to
advance to the next screen(s)
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 661/701
MM COURSE 1
Page | 661
Procedural Steps
Access transaction by:
Via Menus Logistics>Materials Management>Purchasing>MasterData>Vendor>List Displays>
Via Transaction Code MKVZ
On screen “Display Vendor: Initial Screen”, enter information in the fields as
specified in the table below:
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 662/701
MM COURSE 1
Page | 662
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comment
s
Vendor Vendor number O Vendor number known or viamatchcode search
Purchasingorganization
Organizational unit thatnegotiates the generalconditions of purchase for
one or more plants
O Please refer the attached annexure
AccountGroup
The account group is aclassifying feature within
vendor master records
O Select if applicable
(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; “R” = Required, “O” = Optional, “C” = Conditional)
Click on the Execute button.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 663/701
MM COURSE 1
Page | 663
8. MM-ZMMP_VCL01_Vendor_Class and Value_Maintenance
Overview
Vendor Classification (Class I, Class II etc) needs to be maintained in the vendor masters related to Civil as
different class vendors have different tender limits.
Prerequisite:
1. Vendor Master needs to maintained at company code level
2. Class & Value relationship to be defined using t-code ZMMP_VCL01
Business Process:
1. Vendor Master needs to maintained at company code level
2. Class & Value relationship to be defined using t-code ZMMP_VCL01
Activity T Code Remarks
Maintain Class & Value Limit relationship
that be utilized for further classification forvendors
ZMMP_VCL01 Maintain the Class & Value
Relationship, Enter Class, ClassDescription, Value Limit &
Currency
Click on to maintain
more values & class relationship
Procedural Steps:
1. In the screen “Change View “Vendor Classification” :Overview” enter values in the following fields:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Vendorclass
Name a new vendor class C Enter the serial number.
Text 30characters
Give short name to the class. C Write short description.
Value limitfor vendors
Amount defined for that vendorclass
C Enter amount applicable forthat class.
Referencefor
currency
Enter unit C Enter unit.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 664/701
MM COURSE 1
Page | 664
After entering the selection parameter Press Save button .
1.1. “Change View “Vendor Classification” :Overview” Screen:
Fill in the required fields and click “Save button “
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 665/701
MM COURSE 1
Page | 665
9. MM-ZMMP_VC01_Vendor Classification Maintenance
Overview
Vendor Classification (Class I, Class II etc) needs to be maintained in the vendor masters related to Civil as
different class vendors have different tender limits.
Prerequisite:
3. Vendor Master needs to maintained at company code level
4. Class & Value relationship to be defined using t-code ZMMP_VC01.
Business Process:
1. Vendor Classification (Class I, Class II etc) needs to be maintained in the vendor
masters related to Civil as different class vendors have different tender limits
Activity T Code Remarks
Classifying the vendor & assigning therelevant class applicable for the vendor
ZMMP_VC01 Enter Company code & Plant todisplay existing entriesClick on Change button to change
the class
Click on to maintain
Enter vendor code, company code, plant & chose relevant class
applicable for vendor
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 666/701
MM COURSE 1
Page | 666
Procedural Steps
Field NameDescription R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Accountnumber ofvendor
Takes the vendor number. C Enter the vendor number
Company
code
Takes the company code. C Write the company code for
the vendor.
1.1. “Vendor Classification Maintenance” screen:
Enter company code and plant in the required fields.
Press Execute button .
1.2. Screen shows a list of vendors belonging to that plant.
Make any changes if necessary in the vendor class else press “New Entries “tab to add
more vendors.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 667/701
MM COURSE 1
Page | 667
1.3. New entries: Overview of Added Entries:
Fill the required fields and click Enter. Data will be saved.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 668/701
MM COURSE 1
Page | 668
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 669/701
MM COURSE 1
Page | 669
4. Price Info Record
1. MM-ME11-Info Record-Create
Overview
Info Record maintained on plant level is required.
Business Process Description Overview Purchasing Info record helps to define vendor specific information for a material. It provides the option ofstoring information about a vendor and material at purchasing organization and plant level.
Input - Required Fields Field Value / Comments
VendorMaterialPurchasing Organization
Vendor NumberMaterial NumberPurchasing Organization Number
Plant Plant Number
Output - Results Comments
Info Record Creates System Generates a Info record number
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 670/701
MM COURSE 1
Page | 670
Procedural Steps
On Access Display Function by:
Via Menus a) Logistics>Materials Management>Purchasing>Masterdata>Info Record>Create
Via Transaction Code ME11
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 671/701
MM COURSE 1
Page | 671
Create Info record: Initial Screen enter information in table below
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Vendor Vendor Number R Type the vendor code or callF4 to select the vendor
Material Material Number R Type the material code or call
F4 to select material
Purchasing
Org.
Purchasing Organization R Type the respective Purchasing
org or call F4 to select the purchasing org
Plant Plant number R Type the respective plant codeor call F4 to select your plant
InfoCategory
Specifies the type of inforecord
R Select the appropriate categorye.g. standard
(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; R=required; O-Optional; C=Conditional)
Vendor
Materi
Purchasin
Plant
Info
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 672/701
MM COURSE 1
Page | 672
On the screen, Create Info Record: General Data Screen
In general data screen system displays the Info record number, Vendor code, Material code and Materialgroup.
There are some other fields also available with optional entries in this General Data screen.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 673/701
MM COURSE 1
Page | 673
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
1st,2nd,3rd
Rem./Exped.
No of days for
reminder/Expediter
O Mention no of days as
reminder
Vendormaterial no
Material number used by thevendor
O Type the vendor material codeif any
Telephone Vendor‟s Telephone number O Type the vendor telephonenumber
Order Unit Specifies the unit of measurein which the material isordered
R Base unit of measure or theorder unit is defaulted frommaterial master
Conversion Denominator for conversion
of order unit to base unit
R Enter the number of units of
the alternative unit of measure(denominator) that corresponds
to the number of units of the base unit of measure(numerator).
(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; R=required; O-Optional; C=Conditional)
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 674/701
MM COURSE 1
Page | 674
1.4 On Screen, Create Info Record: Purchasing Organization Data 1
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 675/701
MM COURSE 1
Page | 675
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Pl. Deliv.
Time
Planned Delivery time in
Days
R Type the number of days
needed to obtain the material
StandardQty
Standard Purchase orderquantity
R Type the quantity of thematerial that is normallyordered from this vendor
specified in this info record
Net Price Net price in purchasing info
record
R The price is automatically
determined by the system, butyou can also overwrite this
price
PurchasingGroup
Key for a buyer or group of buyers responsible for purchasing activities
R Type the respective purchasinggroup or call F4 to selectappropriate pur group
(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; R=required; O-Optional; C=Conditional)
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 676/701
MM COURSE 1
Page | 676
1.5. On Screen, Create Info Record: Purchasing Organization Data 2
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Quotation Number of vendor‟squotation. The specification is
for information only
O Type the vendor quotation
Quotation
from
Date of vendor‟s quotation.
The specification is forinformation only
O Type the vendor quotation date
(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; R=required; O-Optional; C=Conditional)
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 677/701
MM COURSE 1
Page | 677
1.6 On screen Create Info record : Text overview
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 678/701
MM COURSE 1
Page | 678
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Info Recordnote
A text that describes theobject to which it refers ingreater detail.
O Type the necessary descriptionto describe in greater details
Purchaseorder Text
A text that describes theobject to which it refers in
greater detail.
O Type the necessary descriptionto describe in greater details
(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; R=required; O-Optional; C=Conditional)
Now select the icon at the header of the table or press Ctrl + S to save the document.
System will generate a new info record number
at the bottom of the screen.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 679/701
MM COURSE 1
Page | 679
2. MM-ME12-Info Record-Change
Overview
Info Record maintained on plant level is required.
Business Process Description Overview
Purchasing Info record helps to define vendor specific information for a material. It provides the option ofstoring information about a vendor and material at purchasing organization and plant level.
Under this change transaction we can change the maintained data of an existing purchasing Info record.
Input - Required Fields Field Value / Comments
VendorMaterialPurchasing Organization
Vendor Number
Material NumberPurchasing Organization Number
PlantInfo Record
Plant Number Number of Purchasing Info Record
Output - Results Comments
Info Record Creates System will change the Info record
Procedural Steps
On Access Display Function by:
Via Menus a) Logistics>Materials Management>Purchasing>Masterdata>Info Record>Change
Via Transaction Code ME12
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 680/701
MM COURSE 1
Page | 680
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 681/701
MM COURSE 1
Page | 681
Change Info record: Initial Screen enter information in table below
Vendor
Materi
Purchasin
Plant
Info
Info
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 682/701
MM COURSE 1
Page | 682
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Vendor Vendor Number R Type the vendor code or call
F4 to select the vendorMaterial Material Number R Type the material code or call
F4 to select material
Purchasing
Org.
Purchasing Organization R Type the respective Purchasing
org or call F4 to select the purchasing org
Plant Plant number R Type the respective plant codeor call F4 to select your plant
Info Record Number of purchasing Inforecord
R Specify the Purchasing inforecord number in which you
would like to make changes
Info
Category
Specifies the type of info
record
R Select the appropriate category
e.g. standard
(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; R=required; O-Optional; C=Conditional)
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 683/701
MM COURSE 1
Page | 683
On the screen, Change Info Record: General Data Screen
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 684/701
MM COURSE 1
Page | 684
In general data screen system displays the Info record number, Vendor code, Material code and Materialgroup as encircled and highlighted with red color in the above screen shot.
You can make the changes of the following mentioned fields in the General data Screen.
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
1st,2nd,3rd Rem./Expe
d.
No of days forreminder/Expediter
O You can change the no of daysas reminder
Vendor
material no
Material number used by the
vendor
O Change the vendor material
code if any
Telephone Vendor‟s Telephone number O Change the vendor telephone
number
(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; R=required; O-Optional; C=Conditional)
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 685/701
MM COURSE 1
Page | 685
1.5 On Screen, Change Info Record: Purchasing Organization Data 1
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 686/701
MM COURSE 1
Page | 686
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Pl. Deliv.Time
Planned Delivery time inDays
O Change the number of daysneeded to obtain the material ifrequired
StandardQty
Standard Purchase orderquantity
O Change the quantity of thematerial that is normally
ordered from this vendorspecified in this info record if
required
PurchasingGroup
Key for a buyer or group of buyers responsible for purchasing activities
O Change the respective purchasing group or call F4 toselect appropriate pur group
(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; R=required; O-Optional; C=Conditional)
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 687/701
MM COURSE 1
Page | 687
1.5. On Screen, Change Info Record: Purchasing Organization Data 2
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Quotation Number of vendor‟squotation. The specification is
for information only
O Change the vendor quotation
Quotation
from
Date of vendor‟s quotation.
The specification is forinformation only
O Change the vendor quotation
date
(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; R=required; O-Optional; C=Conditional)
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 688/701
MM COURSE 1
Page | 688
1.6 On screen Change Info record : Text overview
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 689/701
MM COURSE 1
Page | 689
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Info Recordnote
A text that describes theobject to which it refers ingreater detail.
O Change or type the necessarydescription to describe ingreater details
Purchaseorder Text
A text that describes theobject to which it refers ingreater detail.
O Change or type the necessarydescription to describe ingreater details
(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; R=required; O-Optional; C=Conditional)
Now select the icon at the header of the table or press Ctrl + S to save the document.
System will generate a message with stating
that purchasing info record changed.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 690/701
MM COURSE 1
Page | 690
3. MM-ME13-Info Record-Display
Overview
Info Record maintained on plant level is required.
Business Process Description Overview
Display allows one material number to be used for displaying Info Record which is already created.
Display function do not allow any creation or changing of Info Record.
Input - Required Fields Field Value / Comments
VendorMaterialPurchasing Organization
Vendor NumberMaterial Number
Purchasing Organization Number
PlantInfo Record
Plant NumberInfo Record Number
Output - Results Comments
Info Record Displays
Procedural Steps
On Access Display Function by:
Via Menus a) Logistics>Materials Management>Purchasing>Master
data>Info Record>Display
Via Transaction Code ME13
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 691/701
MM COURSE 1
Page | 691
Display Info Record List: Initial Screen: enter information in table below:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Vendor Vendor Number R Number known or via match-code
Material Material Number R Number known or via match-code
PurchasingOrg.
Purchasing Organization R Number known or via match-code
Plant Plant number R Number known or via match-code
Info Record Info Record Number R Number known or via match-code
(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; R=required; O-Optional; C=Conditional)
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 692/701
MM COURSE 1
Page | 692
On screen, Display Info Record: General Data Screen:
The following fields will be displayed:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Info Record Info Record Number R Displays
Vendor Vendor Number C
Material Material Master R Defaults from Initial Screen
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 693/701
MM COURSE 1
Page | 693
1.6 On Screen, Display Info Record: Purchasing Organization Data 1
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 694/701
MM COURSE 1
Page | 694
1.5. On Screen, Display Info Record: Purchasing Organization Data 2
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 695/701
MM COURSE 1
Page | 695
5. Source List
1. MM-ME01-Source List-Maintain
Overview
To maintain list of vendors on material group level which will be used as an information about probable
source for procuring material pertaining to that material group.
Business Process Description Overview
A source list specifies all the sources of supply of a specific material.
This source list will be used just as a reference to have list of all the vendors who supply materials
pertaining to that material group.
Input - Required Fields Field Value / Comments
Material Material Master number (Same as Material group no.)
Plant Receiving Plant
Valid from Date the vendor starts being a valid source
Valid to Dates vendor stops being a valid source
Vendor Suppliers which supply materials belonging to the material groupto which this dummy material relates.
Pur. Org Purchasing Organization
Output - Results Comments Source List Source of supply for specific material within Plant
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 696/701
MM COURSE 1
Page | 696
Tips and Tricks
A source list is specific to each plant. A separate list needs to be maintained for each plant for each
material. (Note: the plant is a mandatory field when creating a source list).
Business Process Procedure Detail
Access Maintain Source Lists manually by:
Via Menus (a) Logistics>Materials Management>Purchasing>MasterData>Source List>Maintain
(b) Logistics>Sales and Distribution>ForeignTrade/Customs>General Foreign TradeProcessing>Environment>Purchase –
Import>Purchasing>Master Data>Source List>Maintain(c) Logistics>Production>KANBAN>Environment>Purchasing
>Master Data>Source List>Maintain
Via Transaction Code ME01
On Maintain Source List: Initial Screen:
Field Name Description R/O
/C
User Action and
Values
Comments
Material Material Master Number
R Material masternumber known orvia match-code
Plant Receiving Plant R Enter receiving plantnumber
(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; R=required; O-Optional; C=Conditional)
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 697/701
MM COURSE 1
Page | 697
Enter .
On Maintain Source List: Overview Screen:
Field Name Description R/O/C * User Action and Values Comments
Material Material Master Number R Defaults from Initial Screen
Plant Receiving Plant R Defaults from Initial Screen
Valid From Date vendor starts being avalid source
R Enter the date
Valid to Dates vendor stops being a
valid source
R Enter date
Vendor Vendor name / number R Enter the known vendornumber or search via match-
code
Pur. Org Purchasing Organization R Please refer the attachedannexure
(* R=Required; O=Optional; C=Conditional)
Enter & Save.
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 698/701
MM COURSE 1
Page | 698
2. MM-ME03-Source List-Display
Overview
Supply source information maintained on material group level is required.
Business Process Description Overview
Display allows one material number to be used for displaying source list which is already created.Display function do not allow any creation or changing of Source Lists
Input - Required Fields Field Value / Comments
Material Material Number
Plant Plant Number
Output - Results Comments
Source List Displays
Procedural Steps
On Access Display Function by:
Via Menus a) Logistics>Materials Management>Purchasing>Master
data>Source List>Display
Via Transaction Code ME03
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 699/701
MM COURSE 1
Page | 699
Display Source List: Initial Screen: enter information in table below:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values CommentsMaterial Material Number R Number known or via match-
code
Plant Plant number R Number known or via match-
code
(Note: On above table, in column “R/O/C”; R=required; O-Optional; C=Conditional)
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 700/701
MM COURSE 1
Page | 700
On screen, Display Source List: Overview Screen: enter information in table below:
The following fields will be displayed:
Field Name Description R/O/C User Action and Values Comments
Material Material Master R Defaults from Initial Screen
Plant Receiving Plant R Defaults from Initial Screen
Valid From Date vendor starts being avalid source
R Displays the date
Valid to Dates vendor stops being avalid source
R Displays date
Pur. Org Purchasing Organization R Displays PurchasingOrganization code
Vendor Vendor Master R Displays Vendor
7/24/2019 1 MM-Master
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/1-mm-master 701/701
MM COURSE 1
3. MM-ME0M-Source List for Material
Overview
Creating possible sources of supply for a material
Business Process Procedure Overview
Source lists records are used in determining the effective source of a material. Source determination is the process of assigning a particular source of supply to a purchase requisition or vice versa. A source list
specifies the possible sources of supply for a material over a given period of time. It shows the time period in which a material may be ordered from a given vendor or under a certain long term purchaseagreement. The system can generate a source list for a material automatically. A source list is created.
Input – Required Fields Field Value/Comments MaterialPlant
Output - Results Source List
Procedural Steps
Access transaction by:
Via Menus a) Logistics> Materials Management> Purchasing> Master
Data> Source List > List Displays> By Material
Via Transaction Code ME0M